Automatic date update in version.in
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
b90efa5b 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
b90efa5b 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
b90efa5b 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a 708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
b3b9c41d
HPN
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
26278bb8
UD
831@kindex --push-state
832@cindex push state governing input file handling
833@item --push-state
834The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848something as follows:
849
850@smallexample
851-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852@end smallexample
853
854@kindex --pop-state
855@cindex pop state governing input file handling
856Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857flags governing input file handling.
858
a712da20
NC
859@kindex -q
860@kindex --emit-relocs
861@cindex retain relocations in final executable
862@item -q
863@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 864Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
865Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867in larger executables.
868
dbab7a7b
NC
869This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
4f471f39
RS
871@kindex --force-dynamic
872@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873@item --force-dynamic
874Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875to VxWorks targets.
876
252b5132
RH
877@cindex partial link
878@cindex relocatable output
879@kindex -r
1049f94e 880@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 881@item -r
1049f94e 882@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 883Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 884turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
885linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 888@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
889If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
62bf86b4
HPN
893When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897with input files in other formats at all.
898
252b5132
RH
899This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901@kindex -R @var{file}
902@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903@cindex symbol-only input
904@item -R @var{filename}
905@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
ff5dcc92 911For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 912followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 913the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
914
915@kindex -s
916@kindex --strip-all
917@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 918@item -s
252b5132
RH
919@itemx --strip-all
920Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922@kindex -S
923@kindex --strip-debug
924@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 925@item -S
252b5132
RH
926@itemx --strip-debug
927Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929@kindex -t
930@kindex --trace
931@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 932@item -t
252b5132 933@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 934Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
935
936@kindex -T @var{script}
937@kindex --script=@var{script}
938@cindex script files
939@item -T @var{scriptfile}
940@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 942@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 943@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
944output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947options accumulate.
252b5132 948
14be8564
L
949@kindex -dT @var{script}
950@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951@cindex script files
952@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963@samp{gcc}).
964
252b5132
RH
965@kindex -u @var{symbol}
966@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967@cindex undefined symbol
968@item -u @var{symbol}
969@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
0a618243
AB
976If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
977into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
978undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
979instead.
980
981@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
982@cindex symbols, require defined
983@cindex defined symbol
984@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
985Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
986is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
987is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
988and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
989@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
990can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
991
252b5132
RH
992@kindex -Ur
993@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 994@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
995For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
996@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 997turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
998@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
999It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1000with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1001be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1002@samp{-r} for the others.
1003
c005eb9e
AB
1004@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1005@cindex orphan sections
1006@cindex sections, orphan
1007@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1008Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1009specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1010
1011@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1012
1013@table @code
1014@item place
1015Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1016the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1017@samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1018
1019@item discard
1020All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1021@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1022
1023@item warn
1024The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1025issue a warning.
1026
1027@item error
1028The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1029@end table
1030
1031The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1032
577a0623
AM
1033@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1034@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1035Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1036@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1037missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1038specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1039multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1040input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1041in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1042
252b5132
RH
1043@kindex -v
1044@kindex -V
1045@kindex --version
1046@cindex version
1047@item -v
1048@itemx --version
1049@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1050Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1051lists the supported emulations.
1052
1053@kindex -x
1054@kindex --discard-all
1055@cindex deleting local symbols
1056@item -x
1057@itemx --discard-all
1058Delete all local symbols.
1059
1060@kindex -X
1061@kindex --discard-locals
1062@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1063@item -X
252b5132 1064@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1065Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1066system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1067or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1068
1069@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1070@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1071@cindex symbol tracing
1072@item -y @var{symbol}
1073@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1074Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1075option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1076to prepend an underscore.
1077
1078This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1079don't know where the reference is coming from.
1080
1081@kindex -Y @var{path}
1082@item -Y @var{path}
1083Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1084for Solaris compatibility.
1085
1086@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1087@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1088The recognized keywords are:
1089@table @samp
1090
1091@item combreloc
1092Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1093lookup caching possible.
1094
1095@item defs
560e09e9 1096Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1097shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1098
6aa29e7b
JJ
1099@item execstack
1100Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1101
b039ef04
L
1102@item global
1103This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1104the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1105of subsequently loaded libraries.
1106
cd6d6c15
NC
1107@item initfirst
1108This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1109It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1110before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1111the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1112the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1113objects.
1114
1115@item interpose
1116Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1117but the primary executable.
1118
5fa222e4
AM
1119@item lazy
1120When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1121dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1122the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1123Lazy binding is the default.
1124
cd6d6c15
NC
1125@item loadfltr
1126Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1127runtime.
1128
1129@item muldefs
1130Allows multiple definitions.
1131
1132@item nocombreloc
1133Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1134
1135@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1136Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1137defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1138
1139@item nodefaultlib
1140Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1141ignore any default library search paths.
1142
1143@item nodelete
1144Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1145
1146@item nodlopen
1147Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1148
1149@item nodump
1150Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1151
6aa29e7b
JJ
1152@item noexecstack
1153Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1154
8dfef1bd
L
1155@item text
1156Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1157
1158@item notext
1159Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1160
1161@item textoff
1162Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1163
6aa29e7b
JJ
1164@item norelro
1165Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1166
cd6d6c15
NC
1167@item now
1168When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1169dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1170when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1171deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1172first called.
1173
1174@item origin
1175Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1176
6aa29e7b
JJ
1177@item relro
1178Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1179
24718e3b
L
1180@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1181Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1182
1183@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1184Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1185
04c3a755
NS
1186@item stack-size=@var{value}
1187Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1188Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1189@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1190
d258b828
IZ
1191@item bndplt
1192Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1193
889c2a67
L
1194@item noextern-protected-data
1195Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1196library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1197to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1198generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1199module aren't visibile to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1200i386 and x86-64.
1201
cd6d6c15
NC
1202@end table
1203
ece2d90e 1204Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1205
1206@kindex -(
1207@cindex groups of archives
1208@item -( @var{archives} -)
1209@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1210The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1211either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1212
1213The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1214references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1215the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1216archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1217object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1218would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1219they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1220resolved.
1221
1222Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1223it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1224more archives.
1225
69da35b5
NC
1226@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1227@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1228@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1229@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1230Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1231recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1232and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1233the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1234behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1235so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1236restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1237
4a43e768
AM
1238@kindex --as-needed
1239@kindex --no-as-needed
1240@item --as-needed
1241@itemx --no-as-needed
1242This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1243on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1244the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1245on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1246needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1247emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1248non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1249the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1250non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1251Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1252the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1253needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1254from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1255
e56f61be
L
1256@kindex --add-needed
1257@kindex --no-add-needed
1258@item --add-needed
1259@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1260These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1261their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1262options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1263and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1264
252b5132
RH
1265@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1266@item -assert @var{keyword}
1267This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1268
1269@kindex -Bdynamic
1270@kindex -dy
1271@kindex -call_shared
1272@item -Bdynamic
1273@itemx -dy
1274@itemx -call_shared
1275Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1276for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1277default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1278for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1279multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1280@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1281
a1ab1d2a
UD
1282@kindex -Bgroup
1283@item -Bgroup
1284Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1285section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1286object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1287@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1288only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1289
252b5132
RH
1290@kindex -Bstatic
1291@kindex -dn
1292@kindex -non_shared
1293@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1294@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1295@itemx -dn
1296@itemx -non_shared
1297@itemx -static
1298Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1299platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1300variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1301may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1302library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1303option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1304option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1305shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1306references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1307libraries.
252b5132
RH
1308
1309@kindex -Bsymbolic
1310@item -Bsymbolic
1311When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1312definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1313for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1314within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1315platforms which support shared libraries.
1316
40b36307
L
1317@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1318@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1319When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1320symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1321This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1322libraries.
1323
55255dae
L
1324@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1325@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1326Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1327typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1328global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1329within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1330to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1331in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1332which support shared libraries.
1333
1334The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1335scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1336
40b36307
L
1337@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1338@item --dynamic-list-data
1339Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1340
1341@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1342@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1343Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1344is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1345
0b8a70d9
L
1346@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1347@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1348Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1349
252b5132
RH
1350@kindex --check-sections
1351@kindex --no-check-sections
1352@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1353@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1354Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1355been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1356perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1357suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1358allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1359restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1360Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1361force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1362option.
252b5132 1363
ddbb8a31
NC
1364@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1365@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1366@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1367@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1368This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1369by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1370command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1371output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1372input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1373specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1374follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1375behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1376
1377This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1378libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1379mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1380their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1381required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1382the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1383dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1384symbols.
1385
252b5132
RH
1386@cindex cross reference table
1387@kindex --cref
1388@item --cref
1389Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1390generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1391Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1392
1393The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1394easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1395sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1396symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1397definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1398where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1399symbol are listed.
252b5132 1400
4818e05f
AM
1401@cindex common allocation
1402@kindex --no-define-common
1403@item --no-define-common
1404This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1405The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1406@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1407
1408The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1409the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1410of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1411forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1412Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1413from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1414This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1415and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1416duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1417paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1418
252b5132 1419@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1420@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1421@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1422Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1423address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1424times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1425limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1426context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1427symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1428constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1429using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1430@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1431equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1432
1433@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1434@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1435@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1436@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1437@itemx --no-demangle
1438These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1439and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1440present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1441underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1442mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1443different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1444to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1445demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1446is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1447
1448@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1449@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1450@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1451@item -I@var{file}
1452@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1453Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1454generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1455linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1456doing.
1457
9b8b325a
RF
1458@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1459@item --no-dynamic-linker
1460When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1461linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1462executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1463entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1464
7ce691ae 1465@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1466@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1467@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1468@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1469Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1470with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1471
252b5132
RH
1472@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1473@item --force-exe-suffix
1474Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1475
1476If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1477@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1478the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1479option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1480Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1481it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1482
1483@kindex --gc-sections
1484@kindex --no-gc-sections
1485@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1486@item --gc-sections
1487@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1488Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1489targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1490performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1491@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1492collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1493implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1494
d5465ba2
AM
1495@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1496examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1497symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1498command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1499referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1500libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1501referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1502the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1503relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1504
ac69cbc6 1505This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1506@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1507specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1508a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1509
c17d87de
NC
1510@kindex --print-gc-sections
1511@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1512@cindex garbage collection
1513@item --print-gc-sections
1514@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1515List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1516printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1517collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1518default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1519be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1520line.
1521
30824704
RM
1522@kindex --print-output-format
1523@cindex output format
1524@item --print-output-format
1525Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1526other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1527in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1528
3604cb1f
TG
1529@kindex --print-memory-usage
1530@cindex memory usage
1531@item --print-memory-usage
1532Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1533the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1534quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1535headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1536parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1537
1538@smallexample
1539Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1540 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1541 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1542@end smallexample
1543
252b5132
RH
1544@cindex help
1545@cindex usage
1546@kindex --help
1547@item --help
1548Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1549
ea20a7da
CC
1550@kindex --target-help
1551@item --target-help
1552Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1553
2509a395
SL
1554@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1555@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1556Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1557@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1558
1559@cindex memory usage
1560@kindex --no-keep-memory
1561@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1562@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1563symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1564instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1565necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1566while linking a large executable.
1567
1568@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1569@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1570@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1571@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1572Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1573is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1574The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1575behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1576libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1577
aa713662
L
1578@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1579@kindex -z muldefs
1580@item --allow-multiple-definition
1581@itemx -z muldefs
1582Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1583report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1584first definition will be used.
1585
b79e8c78 1586@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1587@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1588@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1589@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1590Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1591This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1592determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1593shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1594how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1595
903249d7
NC
1596The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1597referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1598an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1599a shared library.
1600
1601The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1602libraries specified at link time are that:
1603
1604@itemize @bullet
1605@item
1606A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1607that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1608resolvable at load time.
1609@item
1610There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1611symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1612
1613The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1614select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1615architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1616appropriate memset function.
1617@end itemize
b79e8c78 1618
31941635
L
1619@kindex --no-undefined-version
1620@item --no-undefined-version
1621Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1622it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1623will be issued instead.
1624
3e3b46e5
PB
1625@kindex --default-symver
1626@item --default-symver
1627Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1628exported symbols.
1629
1630@kindex --default-imported-symver
1631@item --default-imported-symver
1632Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1633imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1634
252b5132
RH
1635@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1636@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1637Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1638files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1639been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1640This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1641errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1642have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1643inappropriate.
1644
fe7929ce
AM
1645@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1646@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1647Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1648library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1649
252b5132
RH
1650@kindex --no-whole-archive
1651@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1652Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1653archive files.
1654
1655@cindex output file after errors
1656@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1657@item --noinhibit-exec
1658Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1659Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1660errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1661when it issues any error whatsoever.
1662
0a9c1c8e
CD
1663@kindex -nostdlib
1664@item -nostdlib
1665Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1666command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1667(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1668
252b5132 1669@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1670@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1671@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1672@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1673file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1674@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1675object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1676object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1677should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1678usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1679name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1680list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1681command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1682this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1683@end ifclear
1684
36af4a4e
JJ
1685@kindex -pie
1686@kindex --pic-executable
1687@item -pie
1688@itemx --pic-executable
1689@cindex position independent executables
1690Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1691ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1692libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1693address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1694normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1695defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1696
252b5132
RH
1697@kindex -qmagic
1698@item -qmagic
1699This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1700
1701@kindex -Qy
1702@item -Qy
1703This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1704
1705@kindex --relax
1706@cindex synthesizing linker
1707@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1708@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1709@item --relax
28d5f677 1710@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1711An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1712@ifset GENERIC
1713This option is only supported on a few targets.
1714@end ifset
1715@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1716@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1717@end ifset
1718@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1719@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1720@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1721@ifset XTENSA
1722@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1723@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1724@ifset M68HC11
1725@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1726@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1727@ifset NIOSII
1728@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1729@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1730@ifset POWERPC
1731@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1732@end ifset
252b5132 1733
28d5f677
NC
1734On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1735global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1736addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1737synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1738instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1739
1740On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1741debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1742@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1743This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1744family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1745@end ifset
1746
1747@ifset GENERIC
1748On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1749but ignored.
1750@end ifset
1751
28d5f677
NC
1752On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1753@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1754
252b5132
RH
1755@cindex retaining specified symbols
1756@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1757@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1758@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1759@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1760Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1761discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1762symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1763@ifset GENERIC
1764(such as VxWorks)
1765@end ifset
1766where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1767run-time memory.
1768
1769@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1770or symbols needed for relocations.
1771
1772You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1773line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1774
1775@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1776@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1777@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1778@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1779Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1780linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1781arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1782them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1783also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1784objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1785@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1786ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1787@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1788
ff5dcc92 1789The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1790SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1791@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1792runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1793options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1794gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1795file systems.
252b5132 1796
ff5dcc92 1797For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1798followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1799the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1800@end ifset
1801
1802@ifset GENERIC
1803@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1804@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1805@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1806When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1807happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1808of the input files.
1809
1810When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1811non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1812shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1813explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1814specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1815@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1816either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1817appearing multiple times.
1818
28c309a2
NC
1819This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1820that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1821is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1822runtime linker would do.
1823
252b5132 1824The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1825libraries:
252b5132
RH
1826@enumerate
1827@item
ff5dcc92 1828Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1829@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1830Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1831between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1832specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1833used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1834at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1835by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1836the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1837@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1838On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1839@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1840environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1841@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1842On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1843directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1844@item
a1b8d843 1845For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1846variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1847@item
ec4eb78a
L
1848For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1849@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1850libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1851@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1852@item
252b5132
RH
1853The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1854@item
1855For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1856exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1857@end enumerate
1858
1859If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1860warning and continue with the link.
1861@end ifset
1862
1863@kindex -shared
1864@kindex -Bshareable
1865@item -shared
1866@itemx -Bshareable
1867@cindex shared libraries
1868Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1869and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1870shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1871undefined symbols in the link.
1872
252b5132 1873@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1874@item --sort-common
1875@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1876@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1877This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1878ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1879sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1880eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1881between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1882specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1883
2509a395
SL
1884@kindex --sort-section=name
1885@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1886This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1887patterns in the linker script.
1888
2509a395
SL
1889@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1890@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1891This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1892patterns in the linker script.
1893
252b5132 1894@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1895@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1896Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1897each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1898size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1899
1900@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1901@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1902Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1903output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1904This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1905certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1906cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1907that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1908support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1909input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1910more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1911many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1912
1913@kindex --stats
1914@item --stats
1915Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1916as execution time and memory usage.
1917
2509a395 1918@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1919@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1920Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1921configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1922that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1923
252b5132
RH
1924@kindex --traditional-format
1925@cindex traditional format
1926@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1927For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1928the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1929use the traditional format instead.
1930
1931@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1932For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1933symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1934full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1935@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1936trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1937combine duplicate entries.
1938
2509a395
SL
1939@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1940@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1941Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1942address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1943times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1944line.
1945@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1946for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1947@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1948should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1949sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1950
2509a395
SL
1951@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1952@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1953@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1954@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1955@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1956@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1957@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1958Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1959@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1960
2509a395
SL
1961@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1962@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 1963@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
1964When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1965byte of the text segment.
258795f5 1966
9d5777a3
RM
1967@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1968@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1969@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1970When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1971the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1972text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1973
0d705e9f
AM
1974@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1975@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1976@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1977When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1978model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1979
560e09e9
NC
1980@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1981@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1982Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1983values for @samp{method}:
1984
1985@table @samp
1986@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1987Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1988
1989@item report-all
da8bce14 1990Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1991
1992@item ignore-in-object-files
1993Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1994ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1995
1996@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1997Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1998ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1999when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2000libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2001command line.
2002@end table
2003
2004The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2005by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2006
2007Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2008unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2009can change this to a warning.
2010
1715a13c
L
2011@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2012@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2013@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2014@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2015Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2016supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2017the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2018argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2019
2020@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2021@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2022@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2023Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2024used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2025about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2026is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2027see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2028use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2029symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2030@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2031
7ce691ae 2032@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2033@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2034@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2035@item --warn-common
2036Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2037a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2038but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2039you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2040Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2041warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2042
2043There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2044
2045@table @samp
2046@item int i = 1;
2047A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2048file.
2049
2050@item extern int i;
2051An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2052There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2053variable somewhere.
2054
2055@item int i;
2056A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2057variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2058The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2059single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2060size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2061a definition of the same variable.
2062@end table
2063
2064The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2065Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2066just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2067encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2068a common symbol.
2069
2070@enumerate
2071@item
2072Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2073definition for the symbol.
2074@smallexample
2075@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2076 overridden by definition
2077@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2078@end smallexample
2079
2080@item
2081Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2082the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2083except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2084@smallexample
2085@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2086 overriding common
2087@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2088@end smallexample
2089
2090@item
2091Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2092@smallexample
2093@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2094 of `@var{symbol}'
2095@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2096@end smallexample
2097
2098@item
2099Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2100@smallexample
2101@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2102 overridden by larger common
2103@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2104@end smallexample
2105
2106@item
2107Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2108the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2109encountered in a different order.
2110@smallexample
2111@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2112 overriding smaller common
2113@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2114@end smallexample
2115@end enumerate
2116
2117@kindex --warn-constructors
2118@item --warn-constructors
2119Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2120object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2121detect the use of global constructors.
2122
2123@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2124@item --warn-multiple-gp
2125Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2126This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2127Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2128section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2129of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2130base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2131base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2132bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2133large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2134values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2135option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2136
2137@kindex --warn-once
2138@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2139@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2140@item --warn-once
2141Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2142which refers to it.
2143
2144@kindex --warn-section-align
2145@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2146@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2147@item --warn-section-align
2148Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2149alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2150The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2151is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2152the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2153
8fdd7217
NC
2154@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2155@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2156Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2157
a0c402a5
L
2158@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2159@item --warn-alternate-em
2160Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2161
560e09e9
NC
2162@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2163@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2164If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2165@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2166This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2167
2168@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2169@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2170This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2171it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2172
252b5132
RH
2173@kindex --whole-archive
2174@cindex including an entire archive
2175@item --whole-archive
2176For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2177@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2178in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2179files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2180library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2181library. This option may be used more than once.
2182
7ec229ce 2183Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2184about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2185Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2186list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2187your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2188
2509a395
SL
2189@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2190@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2191Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2192@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2193undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2194@var{symbol}.
2195
2196This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2197wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2198wishes to call the system function, it should call
2199@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2200
2201Here is a trivial example:
2202
2203@smallexample
2204void *
cc2f008e 2205__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2206@{
cc2f008e 2207 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2208 return __real_malloc (c);
2209@}
2210@end smallexample
2211
ff5dcc92 2212If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2213all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2214instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2215call the real @code{malloc} function.
2216
2217You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2218links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2219you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2220file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2221call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2222
6aa29e7b
JJ
2223@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2224@item --eh-frame-hdr
2225Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2226@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2227
e41b3a13
JJ
2228@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2229@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2230Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2231generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2232if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2233
6c1439be
L
2234@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2235@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2236@item --enable-new-dtags
2237@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2238This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2239systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2240@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2241and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2242If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2243created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2244those options are only available for ELF systems.
2245
2d643429 2246@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2247@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2248Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2249close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2250time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2251increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2252value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2253
fdc90cb4
JJ
2254@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2255@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2256Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2257@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2258new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2259the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2260hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2261
0ce398f1
L
2262@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2263@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2264@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2265@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2266@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2267@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2268@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2269@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2270On ELF platforms , these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2271compressed using zlib. @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't
19a7fe52
L
2272compress DWARF debug sections.
2273@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
0ce398f1 2274sections and rename debug section names to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
19a7fe52
L
2275instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib}
2276and @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2277compress DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
0ce398f1 2278
35835446
JR
2279@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2280@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2281This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2282linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2283for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2284about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2285
4f9c04f7 2286Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 22871021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2288run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2289has been used.
2290
2291The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2292enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2293
c0065db7
RM
2294@kindex --build-id
2295@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2296@item --build-id
2297@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2298Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2299or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2300unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2301@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2302@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2303@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2304the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2305string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2306@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2307is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2308
2309The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2310that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2311unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2312to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2313file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2314string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2315
2316Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2317@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2318@end table
2319
0285c67d
NC
2320@c man end
2321
36f63dca 2322@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2323
0285c67d
NC
2324@c man begin OPTIONS
2325
ff5dcc92 2326The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2327the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2328normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2329use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2330@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2331like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2332symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2333object file).
2334
2335In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2336support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2337PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2338values by either a space or an equals sign.
2339
ff5dcc92 2340@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2341
2342@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2343@item --add-stdcall-alias
2344If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2345as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2346[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2347
2348@kindex --base-file
2349@item --base-file @var{file}
2350Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2351addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2352@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2353[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2354
2355@kindex --dll
2356@item --dll
2357Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2358@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2359file.
bb10df36 2360[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2361
88183869
DK
2362@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2363@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2364@item --enable-long-section-names
2365@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2366The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2367the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2368for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2369fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2370to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2371allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2372disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2373generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2374as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2375with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2376GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2377information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2378option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2379section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2380when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2381image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2382[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2383
252b5132
RH
2384@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2385@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2386@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2387@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2388If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2389do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2390only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2391resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2392undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2393@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2394to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2395warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2396import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2397to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2398feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2399@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2400mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2401[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2402
522f09cd
KT
2403@kindex --leading-underscore
2404@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2405@item --leading-underscore
2406@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2407For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2408in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2409disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2410
252b5132
RH
2411@cindex DLLs, creating
2412@kindex --export-all-symbols
2413@item --export-all-symbols
2414If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2415be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2416otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2417explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2418attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2419option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2420@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2421@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2422exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2423re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2424such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2425@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2426@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2427Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2428not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2429extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2430(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2431These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2432@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2433@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2434@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2435@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2436[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2437
2438@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2439@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2440Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2441exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2442[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2443
2927aaca
NC
2444@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2445@item --exclude-all-symbols
2446Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2447[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2448
252b5132
RH
2449@kindex --file-alignment
2450@item --file-alignment
2451Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2452file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2453512.
bb10df36 2454[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2455
2456@cindex heap size
2457@kindex --heap
2458@item --heap @var{reserve}
2459@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2460Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2461to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2462committed.
bb10df36 2463[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2464
2465@cindex image base
2466@kindex --image-base
2467@item --image-base @var{value}
2468Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2469the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2470is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2471your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2472other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2473for dlls.
bb10df36 2474[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2475
2476@kindex --kill-at
2477@item --kill-at
2478If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2479symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2480[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2481
26d2d8a2
BF
2482@kindex --large-address-aware
2483@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2484If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2485header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2486greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2487or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2488section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2489[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2490
f69a2f97
NC
2491@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2492@item --disable-large-address-aware
2493Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2494This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2495driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2496addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2497[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2498
252b5132
RH
2499@kindex --major-image-version
2500@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2501Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2502[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2503
2504@kindex --major-os-version
2505@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2506Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2507[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2508
2509@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2510@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2511Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2512[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2513
2514@kindex --minor-image-version
2515@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2516Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2517[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2518
2519@kindex --minor-os-version
2520@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2521Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2522[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2523
2524@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2525@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2526Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2527[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2528
2529@cindex DEF files, creating
2530@cindex DLLs, creating
2531@kindex --output-def
2532@item --output-def @var{file}
2533The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2534file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2535(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2536library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2537automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2538[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2539
b044cda1
CW
2540@cindex DLLs, creating
2541@kindex --out-implib
2542@item --out-implib @var{file}
2543The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2544import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2545import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2546may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2547makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2548creation step.
bb10df36 2549[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2550
2551@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2552@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2553@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2554Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2555@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2556By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2557for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2558execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2559[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2560
2561@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2562@item --disable-auto-image-base
2563Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2564user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2565default.
bb10df36 2566[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2567
2568@cindex DLLs, linking to
2569@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2570@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2571When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2572search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2573@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2574between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2575uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2576@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2577[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2578
2579@kindex --enable-auto-import
2580@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2581Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2582DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2583building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2584'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2585to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2586specification published by Microsoft.
2587
e2a83dd0
NC
2588Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2589data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2590placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2591around a problem with consts that is described here:
2592http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2593
4d8907ac
DS
2594Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2595see this message:
0d888aac 2596
ece2d90e 2597"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2598documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2599
ece2d90e
NC
2600This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2601ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2602allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2603fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2604constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2605multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2606this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2607of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2608the warning, and exit.
2609
2610There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2611data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2612
2fa9fc65
NC
2613One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2614of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2615this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2616
c0065db7
RM
2617A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2618that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2619there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2620a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2621
2622@example
2623extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2624extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2625 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2626@end example
2627
2628or
2629
2630@example
2631extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2632extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2633 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2634@end example
2635
c0065db7 2636For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2637is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2638
2639@example
2640extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2641extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2642 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2643@end example
2644
c406afaf
NC
2645or
2646
2647@example
2648extern long long extern_ll;
2649extern_ll -->
2650 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2651@end example
2652
2fa9fc65 2653A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2654'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2655@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2656requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2657building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2658merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2659between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2660constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2661
2662Original:
2663@example
2664--foo.h
2665extern int arr[];
2666--foo.c
2667#include "foo.h"
2668void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2669 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2670@}
2671@end example
2672
2673Solution 1:
2674@example
2675--foo.h
2676extern int arr[];
2677--foo.c
2678#include "foo.h"
2679void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2680 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2681 volatile int *parr = arr;
2682 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2683@}
2684@end example
2685
2686Solution 2:
2687@example
2688--foo.h
2689/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2690#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2691 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2692#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2693#else
2694#define FOO_IMPORT
2695#endif
2696extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2697--foo.c
2698#include "foo.h"
2699void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2700 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2701@}
2702@end example
2703
c0065db7 2704A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2705library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2706for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2707functions).
bb10df36 2708[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2709
2710@kindex --disable-auto-import
2711@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2712Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2713@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2714[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2715
2fa9fc65
NC
2716@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2717@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2718If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2719that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2720a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2721environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2722[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2723
2724@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2725@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2726Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2727DLLs.
bb10df36 2728[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2729
b044cda1
CW
2730@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2731@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2732Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2733[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2734
252b5132
RH
2735@kindex --section-alignment
2736@item --section-alignment
2737Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2738addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2739[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2740
2741@cindex stack size
2742@kindex --stack
2743@item --stack @var{reserve}
2744@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2745Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2746to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2747committed.
bb10df36 2748[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2749
2750@kindex --subsystem
2751@item --subsystem @var{which}
2752@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2753@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2754Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2755legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2756@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2757the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2758@var{which}.
bb10df36 2759[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2760
2f563b51
DK
2761The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2762of the PE file header:
2763[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2764
2d5c3743
NC
2765@kindex --high-entropy-va
2766@item --high-entropy-va
2767Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2768(ASLR).
2769
2f563b51
DK
2770@kindex --dynamicbase
2771@item --dynamicbase
2772The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2773randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2774Vista for i386 PE targets.
2775
2776@kindex --forceinteg
2777@item --forceinteg
2778Code integrity checks are enforced.
2779
2780@kindex --nxcompat
2781@item --nxcompat
2782The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2783This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2784
2785@kindex --no-isolation
2786@item --no-isolation
2787Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2788
2789@kindex --no-seh
2790@item --no-seh
2791The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2792this image.
2793
2794@kindex --no-bind
2795@item --no-bind
2796Do not bind this image.
2797
2798@kindex --wdmdriver
2799@item --wdmdriver
2800The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2801
2f563b51
DK
2802@kindex --tsaware
2803@item --tsaware
2804The image is Terminal Server aware.
2805
0cb112f7
CF
2806@kindex --insert-timestamp
2807@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2808@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2809Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2810as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2811other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2812will result in slightly different images being produced each tiem the
2813same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2814can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2815that binaries produced from indentical sources will compare
2816identically.
252b5132
RH
2817@end table
2818
0285c67d
NC
2819@c man end
2820
ac145307
BS
2821@ifset C6X
2822@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2823
2824@c man begin OPTIONS
2825
2826The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2827libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2828all executables use an index of 0.
2829
2830@table @gcctabopt
2831
2832@kindex --dsbt-size
2833@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2834This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2835or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2836entries.
2837
2838@kindex --dsbt-index
2839@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2840This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2841to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2842executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2843@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2844
fbd9ad90
PB
2845@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2846The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2847exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2848
ac145307
BS
2849@end table
2850
2851@c man end
2852@end ifset
2853
93fd0973
SC
2854@ifset M68HC11
2855@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2856
2857@c man begin OPTIONS
2858
2859The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2860memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2861
2862@table @gcctabopt
2863
2864@kindex --no-trampoline
2865@item --no-trampoline
2866This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2867is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2868instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2869
2870@kindex --bank-window
2871@item --bank-window @var{name}
2872This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2873the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2874The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2875paging and addresses within the memory window.
2876
2877@end table
2878
2879@c man end
2880@end ifset
2881
7fb9f789
NC
2882@ifset M68K
2883@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2884
2885@c man begin OPTIONS
2886
2887The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2888when linking for 68K targets.
2889
2890@table @gcctabopt
2891
2892@kindex --got
2893@item --got=@var{type}
2894This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2895@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2896@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2897Info entry for @file{ld}.
2898
2899@end table
2900
2901@c man end
2902@end ifset
2903
833794fc
MR
2904@ifset MIPS
2905@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2906
2907@c man begin OPTIONS
2908
2909The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2910generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2911
2912@table @gcctabopt
2913
2914@kindex --insn32
2915@item --insn32
2916@kindex --no-insn32
2917@itemx --no-insn32
2918These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2919generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2920or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
292132-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2922used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2923possible.
2924
2925@end table
2926
2927@c man end
2928@end ifset
2929
252b5132
RH
2930@ifset UsesEnvVars
2931@node Environment
2932@section Environment Variables
2933
0285c67d
NC
2934@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2935
560e09e9 2936You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2937@ifclear SingleFormat
2938@code{GNUTARGET},
2939@end ifclear
2940@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2941
36f63dca 2942@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2943@kindex GNUTARGET
2944@cindex default input format
2945@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2946use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2947of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2948@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2949of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2950attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2951this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2952there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2953object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2954BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2955in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2956@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2957
2958@kindex LDEMULATION
2959@cindex default emulation
2960@cindex emulation, default
2961@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2962@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2963behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2964available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2965the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2966variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2967linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2968
2969@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2970@cindex demangling, default
2971Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2972@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2973default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2974a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2975may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2976options.
2977
0285c67d
NC
2978@c man end
2979@end ifset
2980
252b5132
RH
2981@node Scripts
2982@chapter Linker Scripts
2983
2984@cindex scripts
2985@cindex linker scripts
2986@cindex command files
2987Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2988written in the linker command language.
2989
2990The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2991the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2992the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2993more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2994direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2995described below.
2996
2997The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2998yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2999linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3000to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3001such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3002
3003You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3004line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3005default linker script.
3006
3007You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3008to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3009Linker Scripts}.
3010
3011@menu
3012* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3013* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3014* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3015* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3016* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3017* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3018* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3019* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3020* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3021* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3022* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3023@end menu
3024
3025@node Basic Script Concepts
3026@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3027@cindex linker script concepts
3028We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3029describe the linker script language.
3030
3031The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3032file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3033@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3034The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3035purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3036among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3037section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3038in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3039
3040Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3041also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3042contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3043the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3044A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3045area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3046loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3047which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3048of debugging information.
3049
3050Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3051first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3052the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3053@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3054section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3055same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3056is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3057(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3058based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3059RAM address would be the VMA.
3060
3061You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3062program with the @samp{-h} option.
3063
3064Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3065@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3066has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3067information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3068will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3069static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3070referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3071
3072You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3073program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3074option.
3075
3076@node Script Format
3077@section Linker Script Format
3078@cindex linker script format
3079Linker scripts are text files.
3080
3081You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3082either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3083symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3084generally ignored.
3085
3086Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3087If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3088otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3089double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3090file name.
3091
3092You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3093@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3094to whitespace.
3095
3096@node Simple Example
3097@section Simple Linker Script Example
3098@cindex linker script example
3099@cindex example of linker script
3100Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3101
3102The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3103@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3104memory layout of the output file.
3105
3106The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3107describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3108code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3109@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3110Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3111your input files.
3112
3113For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
31140x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3115linker script which will do that:
3116@smallexample
3117SECTIONS
3118@{
3119 . = 0x10000;
3120 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3121 . = 0x8000000;
3122 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3123 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3124@}
3125@end smallexample
3126
3127You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3128followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3129descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3130
252b5132
RH
3131The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3132sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3133counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3134other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3135current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3136incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3137@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3138
3139The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3140required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3141after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3142which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3143wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3144means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3145
3146Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3147@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3148@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3149
3150The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3151the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3152at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3153output section, the value of the location counter will be
3154@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3155effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3156immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3157
3158The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3159alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3160example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3161sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3162may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3163sections.
3164
3165That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3166
3167@node Simple Commands
3168@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3169@cindex linker script simple commands
3170In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3171
3172@menu
3173* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3174* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3175@ifclear SingleFormat
3176* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3177@end ifclear
3178
4a93e180 3179* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3180* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3181@end menu
3182
3183@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3184@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3185@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3186@cindex start of execution
3187@cindex first instruction
3188@cindex entry point
3189The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3190point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3191entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3192@smallexample
3193ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3194@end smallexample
3195
3196There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3197entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3198stopping when one of them succeeds:
3199@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3200@item
252b5132 3201the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3202@item
252b5132 3203the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3204@item
3ab904c4
NC
3205the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3206targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3207check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3208@item
252b5132 3209the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3210@item
252b5132
RH
3211The address @code{0}.
3212@end itemize
3213
3214@node File Commands
36f63dca 3215@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3216@cindex linker script file commands
3217Several linker script commands deal with files.
3218
3219@table @code
3220@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3221@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3222@cindex including a linker script
3223Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3224be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3225with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
322610 levels deep.
3227
4006703d
NS
3228You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3229@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3230
252b5132
RH
3231@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3232@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3233@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3234@cindex input files in linker scripts
3235@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3236@cindex linker script input object files
3237The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3238in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3239
3240For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3241a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3242then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3243
3244In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3245script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3246
e3f2db7f
AO
3247In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3248with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3249located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3250for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3251open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3252linker will search through the archive library search path.
3253The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3254as the first character in the filename path. See also the
e3f2db7f 3255description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3256
ff5dcc92 3257If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3258name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3259@samp{-l}.
3260
3261When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3262files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3263script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3264
3265@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3266@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3267@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3268@cindex grouping input files
3269The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3270files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3271new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3272in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3273
b717d30e
JJ
3274@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3275@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3276@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3277This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3278commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3279as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3280with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3281when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3282@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3283and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3284setting afterwards.
3285
252b5132
RH
3286@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3287@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3288@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3289The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3290@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3291@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3292Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3293precedence.
3294
3295You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3296output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3297
3298@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3299@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3300@cindex library search path in linker script
3301@cindex archive search path in linker script
3302@cindex search path in linker script
3303The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3304@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3305@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3306on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3307are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3308the command line option are searched first.
3309
3310@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3311@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3312@cindex first input file
3313The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3314that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3315though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3316when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3317first file.
3318@end table
3319
3320@ifclear SingleFormat
3321@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3322@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3323A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3324
3325@table @code
3326@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3327@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3328@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3329@cindex output file format in linker script
3330The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3331output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3332exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3333(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3334line option takes precedence.
3335
3336You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3337formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3338This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3339desired endianness.
3340
3341If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3342will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3343output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3344used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3345
3346For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3347command:
3348@smallexample
3349OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3350@end smallexample
3351This says that the default format for the output file is
3352@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3353option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3354format.
3355
3356@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3357@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3358@cindex input file format in linker script
3359The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3360files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3361This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3362(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3363is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3364command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3365@end table
3366@end ifclear
3367
4a93e180
NC
3368@node REGION_ALIAS
3369@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3370@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3371@cindex region alias
3372@cindex region names
3373
3374Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3375@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3376
3377@smallexample
3378REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3379@end smallexample
3380
3381The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3382memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3383to memory regions. An example follows.
3384
3385Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3386memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3387that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3388non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3389access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3390read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3391sections:
3392
3393@itemize @bullet
3394@item
3395@code{.text} program code;
3396@item
3397@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3398@item
3399@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3400@item
3401@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3402@end itemize
3403
3404The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3405part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3406output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3407systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3408@code{C}:
3409@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3410@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3411@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3412@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3413@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3414@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3415@end multitable
3416The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3417loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3418the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3419the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3420
3421The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3422includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3423memory layout:
3424@smallexample
3425INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3426
3427SECTIONS
3428 @{
3429 .text :
3430 @{
3431 *(.text)
3432 @} > REGION_TEXT
3433 .rodata :
3434 @{
3435 *(.rodata)
3436 rodata_end = .;
3437 @} > REGION_RODATA
3438 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3439 @{
3440 data_start = .;
3441 *(.data)
3442 @} > REGION_DATA
3443 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3444 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3445 .bss :
3446 @{
3447 *(.bss)
3448 @} > REGION_BSS
3449 @}
3450@end smallexample
3451
3452Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3453regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3454variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3455@table @code
3456@item A
3457Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3458@smallexample
3459MEMORY
3460 @{
3461 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3462 @}
3463
3464REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3465REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3466REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3467REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3468@end smallexample
3469@item B
3470Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3471into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3472@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3473@smallexample
3474MEMORY
3475 @{
3476 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3477 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3478 @}
3479
3480REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3481REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3482REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3483REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3484@end smallexample
3485@item C
3486Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3487@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3488initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3489system start into the @code{RAM}.
3490@smallexample
3491MEMORY
3492 @{
3493 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3494 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3495 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3496 @}
3497
3498REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3499REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3500REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3501REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3502@end smallexample
3503@end table
3504
3505It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3506@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3507necessary:
3508@smallexample
3509#include <string.h>
3510
3511extern char data_start [];
3512extern char data_size [];
3513extern char data_load_start [];
3514
3515void copy_data(void)
3516@{
3517 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3518 @{
3519 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3520 @}
3521@}
3522@end smallexample
3523
252b5132 3524@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3525@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3526There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3527
3528@table @code
3529@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3530@kindex ASSERT
3531@cindex assertion in linker script
3532Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3533with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3534
fd1c4238
NC
3535Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3536take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3537inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3538for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3539symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3540
3541@smallexample
3542 .stack :
3543 @{
3544 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3545 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3546 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3547 @}
3548@end smallexample
3549
3550will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3551PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3552can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3553
3554@smallexample
3555 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3556 .stack :
3557 @{
3558 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3559 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3560 @}
3561@end smallexample
3562
3563will work.
3564
252b5132
RH
3565@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3566@kindex EXTERN
3567@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3568Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3569symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3570modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3571each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3572command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3573
3574@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3575@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3576@cindex common allocation in linker script
3577This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3578to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3579output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3580
4818e05f
AM
3581@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3582@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3583@cindex common allocation in linker script
3584This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3585command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3586to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3587
53d25da6
AM
3588@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3589@kindex INSERT
3590@cindex insert user script into default script
3591This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3592augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3593inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3594@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3595default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3596sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3597linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3598insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3599linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3600default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3601of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3602to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3603is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3604
3605@smallexample
3606SECTIONS
3607@{
3608 OVERLAY :
3609 @{
3610 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3611 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3612 @}
3613@}
3614INSERT AFTER .text;
3615@end smallexample
3616
252b5132
RH
3617@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3618@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3619@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3620This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3621references among certain output sections.
3622
3623In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3624using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3625will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3626errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3627a function defined in the other section.
3628
3629The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3630@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3631an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3632@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3633names.
3634
3635@ifclear SingleFormat
3636@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3637@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3638@cindex machine architecture
3639@cindex architecture
3640Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3641of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3642architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3643the @samp{-f} option.
3644@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3645
3646@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3647@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3648This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3649@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3650in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3651@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3652@end table
3653
3654@node Assignments
3655@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3656@cindex assignment in scripts
3657@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3658@cindex variables, defining
3659You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3660the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3661
3662@menu
3663* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3664* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3665* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3666* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3667* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3668@end menu
3669
3670@node Simple Assignments
3671@subsection Simple Assignments
3672
3673You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3674
3675@table @code
3676@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3677@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3678@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3679@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3680@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3681@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3682@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3683@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3684@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3685@end table
3686
3687The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3688@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3689defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3690
3691The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3692may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3693
3694The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3695
3696Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3697
3698You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3699statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3700section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3701
3702The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3703expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3704
3705Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3706assignments may be used:
3707
3708@smallexample
3709floating_point = 0;
3710SECTIONS
3711@{
3712 .text :
3713 @{
3714 *(.text)
3715 _etext = .;
3716 @}
156e34dd 3717 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3718 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3719@}
3720@end smallexample
3721@noindent
3722In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3723zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3724the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3725defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3726upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3727
eb8476a6
MR
3728@node HIDDEN
3729@subsection HIDDEN
3730@cindex HIDDEN
3731For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3732exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3733
3734Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3735@code{HIDDEN}:
3736
3737@smallexample
3738HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3739SECTIONS
3740@{
3741 .text :
3742 @{
3743 *(.text)
3744 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3745 @}
3746 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3747 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3748@}
3749@end smallexample
3750@noindent
3751In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3752
252b5132
RH
3753@node PROVIDE
3754@subsection PROVIDE
3755@cindex PROVIDE
3756In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3757only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3758the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3759@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3760@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3761@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3762@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3763@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3764
3765Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3766@smallexample
3767SECTIONS
3768@{
3769 .text :
3770 @{
3771 *(.text)
3772 _etext = .;
3773 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3774 @}
3775@}
3776@end smallexample
3777
3778In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3779underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3780the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3781underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3782If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3783linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3784
7af8e998
L
3785@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3786@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3787@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3788Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3789hidden and won't be exported.
3790
73ae6183
NC
3791@node Source Code Reference
3792@subsection Source Code Reference
3793
3794Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3795intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3796a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3797symbol that does not have a value.
3798
3799Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3800transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3801stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3802prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3803mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3804of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3805variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3806linker script variable might be referred to as:
3807
3808@smallexample
3809 extern int foo;
3810@end smallexample
3811
3812But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3813
3814@smallexample
3815 _foo = 1000;
3816@end smallexample
3817
3818In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3819transformation has taken place.
3820
3821When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3822things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3823in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3824second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3825table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3826contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3827value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3828
3829@smallexample
3830 int foo = 1000;
3831@end smallexample
3832
10bf6894 3833creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3834holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3835number 1000 is initially stored.
3836
3837When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3838first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3839memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3840So:
3841
3842@smallexample
3843 foo = 1;
3844@end smallexample
3845
3846looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3847associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3848address. Whereas:
3849
3850@smallexample
3851 int * a = & foo;
3852@end smallexample
3853
10bf6894 3854looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3855and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3856the variable @samp{a}.
3857
3858Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3859the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3860an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3861
3862@smallexample
3863 foo = 1000;
3864@end smallexample
3865
3866creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3867the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3868address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3869linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3870access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3871
3872Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3873you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3874use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3875section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3876linker script contains these declarations:
3877
3878@smallexample
3879@group
3880 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 3881 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
3882 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3883@end group
3884@end smallexample
3885
3886Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3887
3888@smallexample
3889@group
3890 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3891
73ae6183
NC
3892 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3893@end group
3894@end smallexample
3895
3896Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
3897Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
3898arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
3899
3900@smallexample
3901@group
3902 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
3903
3904 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
3905@end group
3906@end smallexample
3907
3908Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
3909operators.
73ae6183 3910
252b5132 3911@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3912@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3913@kindex SECTIONS
3914The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3915into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3916
3917The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3918@smallexample
3919SECTIONS
3920@{
3921 @var{sections-command}
3922 @var{sections-command}
3923 @dots{}
3924@}
3925@end smallexample
3926
3927Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3928
3929@itemize @bullet
3930@item
3931an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3932@item
3933a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3934@item
3935an output section description
3936@item
3937an overlay description
3938@end itemize
3939
3940The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3941@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3942those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3943understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3944the layout of the output file.
3945
3946Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3947below.
3948
3949If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3950linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3951section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3952input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3953example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3954in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3955
3956@menu
3957* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3958* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3959* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3960* Input Section:: Input section description
3961* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3962* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3963* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3964* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3965* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3966@end menu
3967
3968@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3969@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3970The full description of an output section looks like this:
3971@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3972@group
7e7d5768 3973@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 3974 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 3975 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
3976 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3977 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3978 @{
3979 @var{output-section-command}
3980 @var{output-section-command}
3981 @dots{}
abc9061b 3982 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
3983@end group
3984@end smallexample
3985
3986Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3987
3988The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3989name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
3990The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3991the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
3992The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3993
3994Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3995
3996@itemize @bullet
3997@item
3998a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3999@item
4000an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4001@item
4002data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4003@item
4004a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4005@end itemize
4006
4007@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4008@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4009@cindex name, section
4010@cindex section name
4011The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4012meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4013support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4014must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4015example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4016output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4017names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4018quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4019characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4020commas must be quoted.
4021
4022The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4023Discarding}.
4024
4025@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4026@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4027@cindex address, section
4028@cindex section address
4029The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4030address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4031is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4032
4033If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4034section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4035to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4036alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4037contained within the output section.
4038
4039The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4040
4041@itemize @bullet
4042@item
4043If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4044is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4045in that region.
4046
4047@item
4048If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4049regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4050section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4051be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4052
4053@item
4054If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4055the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4056counter.
4057@end itemize
4058
4059@noindent
4060For example:
4061
252b5132
RH
4062@smallexample
4063.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4064@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4065
252b5132
RH
4066@noindent
4067and
ea5cae92 4068
252b5132
RH
4069@smallexample
4070.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4071@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4072
252b5132
RH
4073@noindent
4074are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4075@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4076counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4077counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4078input sections.
252b5132
RH
4079
4080The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4081For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4082so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4083do something like this:
4084@smallexample
4085.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4086@end smallexample
4087@noindent
4088This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4089aligned upward to the specified value.
4090
4091Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4092location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4093sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4094
4095@node Input Section
36f63dca 4096@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4097@cindex input sections
4098@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4099The most common output section command is an input section description.
4100
4101The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4102You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4103in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4104map the input files into your memory layout.
4105
4106@menu
4107* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4108* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4109* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4110* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4111* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4112@end menu
4113
4114@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4115@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4116@cindex input section basics
4117An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4118by a list of section names in parentheses.
4119
4120The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4121describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4122
4123The most common input section description is to include all input
4124sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4125include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4126@smallexample
4127*(.text)
4128@end smallexample
4129@noindent
18625d54
CM
4130Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4131of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4132match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4133example:
252b5132 4134@smallexample
b4346c09 4135*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4136@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
4137will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4138@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
4139
4140There are two ways to include more than one section:
4141@smallexample
4142*(.text .rdata)
4143*(.text) *(.rdata)
4144@end smallexample
4145@noindent
4146The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4147@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4148first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4149they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4150@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4151@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4152
4153You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4154You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4155needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4156@smallexample
4157data.o(.data)
4158@end smallexample
4159
ae17ab41
CM
4160To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4161of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4162
4163Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4164
4165@smallexample
4166@group
4167SECTIONS @{
4168 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4169 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4170@}
4171@end group
4172@end smallexample
4173
4174In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4175input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4176@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4177@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4178whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4179
967928e9
AM
4180You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4181matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4182with no whitespace around the colon.
4183
4184@table @samp
4185@item archive:file
4186matches file within archive
4187@item archive:
4188matches the whole archive
4189@item :file
4190matches file but not one in an archive
4191@end table
4192
4193Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4194wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4195single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4196@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4197within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4198also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4199other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4200from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4201command.
4202
252b5132
RH
4203If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4204the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4205commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4206@smallexample
4207data.o
4208@end smallexample
4209
967928e9
AM
4210When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4211and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4212characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4213name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4214did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4215though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4216@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4217the archive search path.
4218
4219@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4220@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4221@cindex input section wildcards
4222@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4223@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4224@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4225In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4226name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4227
4228The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4229pattern for the file name.
4230
4231The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4232
4233@table @samp
4234@item *
4235matches any number of characters
4236@item ?
4237matches any single character
4238@item [@var{chars}]
4239matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4240character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4241@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4242@item \
4243quotes the following character
4244@end table
4245
4246When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4247will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4248Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4249exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4250@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4251a @samp{/} character.
4252
4253File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4254specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4255does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4256
4257If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4258appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4259will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4260sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4261@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4262@smallexample
4263.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4264.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4265@end smallexample
4266
bcaa7b3e 4267@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4268Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4269in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4270this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4271pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4272@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4273into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4274
bcaa7b3e
L
4275@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4276@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4277difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4278descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4279Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4280reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4281
02ecc8e9
L
4282@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4283@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4284difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4285ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4286encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4287
bcaa7b3e
L
4288@cindex SORT
4289@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4290
4291When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4292can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4293
4294@enumerate
4295@item
4296@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4297It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4298sections have the same name.
4299@item
4300@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4301It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4302sections have the same alignment.
4303@item
c0065db7 4304@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4305treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4306@item
4307@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4308is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4309@item
4310All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4311@end enumerate
4312
4313When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4314section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4315takes precedence over the command line option.
4316
4317If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4318command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4319treated as nested sorting command.
4320
4321@enumerate
4322@item
4323@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4324@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4325@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4326@item
4327@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4328@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4329@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4330@end enumerate
4331
4332If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4333command line option will be ignored.
4334
eda680f8
L
4335@cindex SORT_NONE
4336@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4337section sorting option.
4338
252b5132
RH
4339If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4340@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4341precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4342
4343This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4344files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4345sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4346The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4347with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4348linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4349@smallexample
4350@group
4351SECTIONS @{
4352 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4353 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4354 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4355 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4356@}
4357@end group
4358@end smallexample
4359
4360@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4361@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4362@cindex common symbol placement
4363@cindex uninitialized data placement
4364A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4365file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4366linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4367named @samp{COMMON}.
4368
4369You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4370other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4371particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4372input files are placed in another section.
4373
4374In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4375@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4376@smallexample
4377.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4378@end smallexample
4379
4380@cindex scommon section
4381@cindex small common symbols
4382Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4383example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4384symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4385different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4386the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4387symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4388to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4389locations.
4390
4391@cindex [COMMON]
4392You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4393notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4394@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4395
4396@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4397@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4398@cindex KEEP
4399@cindex garbage collection
4400When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4401it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4402This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4403with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4404@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4405
4406@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4407@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4408The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4409to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4410start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4411@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4412follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4413@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4414@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4415All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4416files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4417
4418@smallexample
4419@group
4420SECTIONS @{
4421 outputa 0x10000 :
4422 @{
4423 all.o
4424 foo.o (.input1)
4425 @}
36f63dca
NC
4426@end group
4427@group
252b5132
RH
4428 outputb :
4429 @{
4430 foo.o (.input2)
4431 foo1.o (.input1)
4432 @}
36f63dca
NC
4433@end group
4434@group
252b5132
RH
4435 outputc :
4436 @{
4437 *(.input1)
4438 *(.input2)
4439 @}
4440@}
4441@end group
a1ab1d2a 4442@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4443
4444@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4445@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4446@cindex data
4447@cindex section data
4448@cindex output section data
4449@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4450@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4451@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4452@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4453@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4454You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4455@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4456an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4457parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4458value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4459counter.
4460
4461The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4462store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4463bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4464stored.
4465
4466For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4467of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4468@smallexample
4469BYTE(1)
4470LONG(addr)
4471@end smallexample
4472
4473When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4474same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4475target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4476@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4477@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4478
4479If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4480which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4481When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4482true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4483endianness of the first input object file.
4484
36f63dca 4485Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4486between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4487@smallexample
4488SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4489@end smallexample
4490whereas this will work:
4491@smallexample
4492SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4493@end smallexample
4494
252b5132
RH
4495@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4496@cindex holes, filling
4497@cindex unspecified memory
4498You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4499current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4500otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4501gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4502with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4503necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4504point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4505than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4506different parts of an output section.
4507
4508This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4509value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4510@smallexample
563e308f 4511FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4512@end smallexample
4513
4514The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4515section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4516part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4517entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4518precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4519expression.
252b5132
RH
4520
4521@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4522@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4523There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4524commands.
4525
4526@table @code
4527@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4528@cindex input filename symbols
4529@cindex filename symbols
4530@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4531The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4532The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4533file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4534the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4535
4536This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4537normally used for any other object file format.
4538
4539@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4540@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4541@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4542@item CONSTRUCTORS
4543When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4544unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4545destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4546arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4547automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4548For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4549linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4550@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4551ignored for other object file formats.
4552
4553The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4554constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4555Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4556the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4557first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4558of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4559compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4560formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4561@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4562the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4563destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4564@code{exit}.
4565
4566For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4567arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4568addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4569and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4570linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4571runtime code expects to see.
4572
4573@smallexample
4574 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4575 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4576 *(.ctors)
4577 LONG(0)
4578 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4579 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4580 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4581 *(.dtors)
4582 LONG(0)
4583 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4584@end smallexample
4585
4586If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4587which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4588are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4589are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4590command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4591@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4592@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4593@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4594
4595Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4596and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4597need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4598scripts.
4599
4600@end table
4601
4602@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4603@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4604@cindex discarding sections
4605@cindex sections, discarding
4606@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4607The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4608This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4609may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4610@smallexample
49c13adb 4611.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4612@end smallexample
4613@noindent
4614will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4615@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4616sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4617space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4618too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4619space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4620@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4621@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4622This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4623
a0976ea4 4624The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4625on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4626symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4627the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4628section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4629
4630@cindex /DISCARD/
4631The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4632input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4633section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4634
4635@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4636@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4637@cindex output section attributes
4638We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4639like this:
0c71d759 4640
252b5132 4641@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4642@group
7e7d5768 4643@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4644 [AT(@var{lma})]
4645 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4646 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4647 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4648 @{
4649 @var{output-section-command}
4650 @var{output-section-command}
4651 @dots{}
562d3460 4652 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4653@end group
4654@end smallexample
0c71d759 4655
252b5132
RH
4656We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4657@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4658remaining section attributes.
4659
a1ab1d2a 4660@menu
252b5132
RH
4661* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4662* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4663* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4664* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4665* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4666* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4667* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4668* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4669@end menu
4670
4671@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4672@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4673Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4674parentheses. The following types are defined:
4675
4676@table @code
4677@item NOLOAD
4678The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4679loaded into memory when the program is run.
4680@item DSECT
4681@itemx COPY
4682@itemx INFO
4683@itemx OVERLAY
4684These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4685rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4686marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4687section when the program is run.
4688@end table
4689
4690@kindex NOLOAD
4691@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4692@cindex loading, preventing
4693The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4694the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4695the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4696@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4697need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4698@smallexample
4699@group
4700SECTIONS @{
4701 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4702 @dots{}
4703@}
4704@end group
4705@end smallexample
4706
4707@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4708@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4709@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4710@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4711@cindex load address
4712@cindex section load address
4713Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4714@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4715@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4716specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4717address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4718
ea5cae92
NC
4719The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4720specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4721takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4722load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4723region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4724
4725If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4726section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4727load address:
4728
4729@itemize @bullet
4730@item
4731If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4732the LMA address as well.
4733
4734@item
4735If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4736
4737@item
4738Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4739with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4740section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4741VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4742the last section in the located region.
4743
4744@item
4745If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4746that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4747
4748@item
4749If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4750section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4751@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4752
4753@cindex ROM initialized data
4754@cindex initialized data in ROM
4755This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4756example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4757called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4758@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4759even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4760uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4761defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4762counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4763
4764@smallexample
4765@group
4766SECTIONS
4767 @{
4768 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4769 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4770 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4771 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4772 .bss 0x3000 :
4773 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4774@}
4775@end group
4776@end smallexample
4777
4778The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4779this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4780the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4781how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4782script.
4783
4784@smallexample
4785@group
4786extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4787char *src = &_etext;
4788char *dst = &_data;
4789
ea5cae92
NC
4790/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4791while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4792 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4793
ea5cae92 4794/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4795for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4796 *dst = 0;
4797@end group
4798@end smallexample
4799
bbf115d3
L
4800@node Forced Output Alignment
4801@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4802@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4803@cindex forcing output section alignment
4804@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4805You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4806alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4807intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4808
7e7d5768
AM
4809@node Forced Input Alignment
4810@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4811@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4812@cindex forcing input section alignment
4813@cindex input section alignment
4814You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4815SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4816sections, whether larger or smaller.
4817
0c71d759
NC
4818@node Output Section Constraint
4819@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4820@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4821@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4822@cindex constraints on output sections
4823You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4824of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4825read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4826@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4827
252b5132 4828@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4829@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4830@kindex >@var{region}
4831@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4832@cindex memory regions and sections
4833You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4834using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4835
4836Here is a simple example:
4837@smallexample
4838@group
4839MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4840SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4841@end group
4842@end smallexample
4843
4844@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4845@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4846@kindex :@var{phdr}
4847@cindex section, assigning to program header
4848@cindex program headers and sections
4849You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4850using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4851one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4852assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4853@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4854linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4855
4856Here is a simple example:
4857@smallexample
4858@group
4859PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4860SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4861@end group
4862@end smallexample
4863
4864@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4865@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4866@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4867@cindex section fill pattern
4868@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4869You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4870@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4871(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4872within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4873alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4874necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4875of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4876an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4877fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4878other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4879pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4880expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4881
4882You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4883output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4884
4885Here is a simple example:
4886@smallexample
4887@group
563e308f 4888SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4889@end group
4890@end smallexample
4891
4892@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4893@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4894@kindex OVERLAY
4895@cindex overlays
4896An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4897are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4898the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4899copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4900required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4901can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4902than another.
4903
4904Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4905@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4906output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4907command is as follows:
4908@smallexample
4909@group
4910OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4911 @{
4912 @var{secname1}
4913 @{
4914 @var{output-section-command}
4915 @var{output-section-command}
4916 @dots{}
4917 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4918 @var{secname2}
4919 @{
4920 @var{output-section-command}
4921 @var{output-section-command}
4922 @dots{}
4923 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4924 @dots{}
abc9061b 4925 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4926@end group
4927@end smallexample
4928
4929Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4930section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4931section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4932those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4933except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4934sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4935
abc9061b
CC
4936The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4937the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4938
252b5132
RH
4939The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4940addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4941memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4942whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4943and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4944and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4945
56dd11f0
NC
4946If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4947references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4948the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4949sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4950@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4951
4952For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4953provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4954defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4955@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4956the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4957within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4958symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4959
4960At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4961the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4962
4963Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4964@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4965@smallexample
4966@group
4967 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4968 @{
4969 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4970 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4971 @}
4972@end group
4973@end smallexample
4974@noindent
4975This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4976address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4977@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4978following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4979@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4980@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4981
4982C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4983like the following.
4984
4985@smallexample
4986@group
4987 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4988 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4989 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4990@end group
4991@end smallexample
4992
4993Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4994everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4995example could have been written identically as follows.
4996
4997@smallexample
4998@group
4999 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5000 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5001 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5002 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5003 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5004 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5005 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5006@end group
5007@end smallexample
5008
5009@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5010@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5011@kindex MEMORY
5012@cindex memory regions
5013@cindex regions of memory
5014@cindex allocating memory
5015@cindex discontinuous memory
5016The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5017memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5018
5019The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5020memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5021may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5022can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5023set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5024regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5025around to fit into the available regions.
5026
127fcdff
AB
5027A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5028however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5029specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5030@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5031@smallexample
5032@group
a1ab1d2a 5033MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5034 @{
5035 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5036 @dots{}
5037 @}
5038@end group
5039@end smallexample
5040
5041The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5042region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5043Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5044with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5045must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5046add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5047command.
252b5132
RH
5048
5049@cindex memory region attributes
5050The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5051whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5052not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5053@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5054section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5055the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5056them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5057
5058The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5059@table @samp
5060@item R
5061Read-only section
5062@item W
5063Read/write section
5064@item X
5065Executable section
5066@item A
5067Allocatable section
5068@item I
5069Initialized section
5070@item L
5071Same as @samp{I}
5072@item !
c09e9a8c 5073Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5074@end table
5075
5076If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5077@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5078attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5079in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5080attributes.
5081
5082@kindex ORIGIN =
5083@kindex o =
5084@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5085The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5086the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5087cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5088abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5089@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5090
5091@kindex LENGTH =
5092@kindex len =
5093@kindex l =
5094The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5095region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5096be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5097@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5098
5099In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5100available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5101and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5102linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5103is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5104or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5105explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5106region.
5107
5108@smallexample
5109@group
a1ab1d2a 5110MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5111 @{
5112 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5113 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5114 @}
5115@end group
5116@end smallexample
5117
5118Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5119specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5120@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5121a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5122output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5123was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5124the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5125output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5126region, the linker will issue an error message.
5127
3ec57632 5128It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5129expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5130@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5131
5132@smallexample
5133@group
c0065db7 5134 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5135@end group
5136@end smallexample
5137
252b5132
RH
5138@node PHDRS
5139@section PHDRS Command
5140@kindex PHDRS
5141@cindex program headers
5142@cindex ELF program headers
5143@cindex program segments
5144@cindex segments, ELF
5145The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5146@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5147loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5148program with the @samp{-p} option.
5149
5150When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5151reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5152program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5153This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5154interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5155
5156The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5157in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5158precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5159the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5160not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5161
5162The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5163generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5164ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5165
5166This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5167@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5168
5169@smallexample
5170@group
5171PHDRS
5172@{
5173 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5174 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5175@}
5176@end group
5177@end smallexample
5178
5179The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5180of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5181header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5182with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5183must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5184is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5185
5186Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5187system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5188specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5189sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5190attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5191Section Phdr}.
5192
5193It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5194merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5195repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5196contain the section.
5197
5198If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5199then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5200not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5201convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5202placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5203default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5204segment at all.
5205
5206@kindex FILEHDR
5207@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5208You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5209the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5210The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5211file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5212include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5213segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5214these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5215
5216The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5217value of the keyword.
5218
5219@table @asis
5220@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5221Indicates an unused program header.
5222
5223@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5224Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5225the file.
5226
5227@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5228Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5229
5230@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5231Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5232found.
5233
5234@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5235Indicates a segment holding note information.
5236
5237@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5238A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5239ABI.
5240
5241@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5242Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5243
5244@item @var{expression}
5245An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5246be used for types not defined above.
5247@end table
5248
5249You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5250in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5251@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5252Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5253output section attribute.
5254
5255The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5256which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5257explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5258an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5259header.
5260
5261Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5262headers used on a native ELF system.
5263
5264@example
5265@group
5266PHDRS
5267@{
5268 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5269 interp PT_INTERP ;
5270 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5271 data PT_LOAD ;
5272 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5273@}
5274
5275SECTIONS
5276@{
5277 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5278 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5279 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5280 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5281 @dots{}
5282 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5283 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5284 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5285 @dots{}
5286@}
5287@end group
5288@end example
5289
5290@node VERSION
5291@section VERSION Command
5292@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5293@cindex symbol versions
5294@cindex version script
5295@cindex versions of symbols
5296The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5297only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5298symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5299a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5300shared library.
5301
5302You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5303you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5304also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5305
5306The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5307@smallexample
5308VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5309@end smallexample
5310
5311The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5312Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5313version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5314version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5315version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5316scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5317library.
5318
5319The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5320examples.
5321
5322@smallexample
5323VERS_1.1 @{
5324 global:
5325 foo1;
5326 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5327 old*;
5328 original*;
5329 new*;
252b5132
RH
5330@};
5331
5332VERS_1.2 @{
5333 foo2;
5334@} VERS_1.1;
5335
5336VERS_2.0 @{
5337 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5338 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5339 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5340 "f(int, double)";
5341 @};
252b5132
RH
5342@} VERS_1.2;
5343@end smallexample
5344
5345This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5346version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5347The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5348a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5349of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5350symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5351is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5352in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5353However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5354name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5355
5356Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5357depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5358to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5359
5360Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5361depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5362and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5363
5364When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5365specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5366unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5367unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5368somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5369wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5370wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5371set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5372ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5373
5374The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5375they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5376could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5377However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5378
0f6bf451 5379Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5380in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5381symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5382won't.
5383
5384@smallexample
7c9c73be 5385@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5386@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5387
252b5132
RH
5388When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5389symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5390requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5391shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5392loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5393linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5394application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5395way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5396all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5397search for each symbol reference.
5398
5399The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5400doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5401that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5402functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5403the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5404required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5405that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5406versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5407the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5408
5409There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5410first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5411source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5412script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5413maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5414@smallexample
5415__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5416@end smallexample
5417@noindent
5418in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5419be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5420The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5421@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5422takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5423
5424The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5425function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5426an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5427version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5428linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5429
5430To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5431source file. Here is an example:
5432
5433@smallexample
5434__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5435__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5436__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5437__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5438@end smallexample
5439
5440In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5441unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5442example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5443@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5444
5445When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5446some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5447this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5448@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5449declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5450you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5451
5452If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5453within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5454(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5455specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5456
cb840a31
L
5457You can also specify the language in the version script:
5458
5459@smallexample
5460VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5461@end smallexample
5462
c0065db7 5463The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5464The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5465demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5466patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5467@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5468
86043bbb
MM
5469Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5470described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5471or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5472the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5473whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5474cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5475might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5476should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5477expect when you upgrade.
5478
252b5132
RH
5479@node Expressions
5480@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5481@cindex expressions
5482@cindex arithmetic
5483The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5484that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5485expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5486host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5487
5488You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5489
5490The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5491expressions.
5492
5493@menu
5494* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5495* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5496* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5497* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5498* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5499* Operators:: Operators
5500* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5501* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5502* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5503@end menu
5504
5505@node Constants
5506@subsection Constants
5507@cindex integer notation
5508@cindex constants in linker scripts
5509All constants are integers.
5510
5511As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5512octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5513hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5514@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5515@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5516value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5517
5518@cindex scaled integers
5519@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5520@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5521@cindex suffixes for integers
5522@cindex integer suffixes
5523In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5524constant by
5525@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5526@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5527@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5528@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5529@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5530@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5531@tex
5532${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5533@end tex
5534@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5535respectively. For example, the following
5536all refer to the same quantity:
5537
252b5132 5538@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5539_fourk_1 = 4K;
5540_fourk_2 = 4096;
5541_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5542_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5543@end smallexample
5544
8a308ae8
NC
5545Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5546conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5547
0c71d759
NC
5548@node Symbolic Constants
5549@subsection Symbolic Constants
5550@cindex symbolic constants
5551@kindex CONSTANT
5552It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5553the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5554
5555@table @code
5556@item MAXPAGESIZE
5557@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5558The target's maximum page size.
5559
5560@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5561@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5562The target's default page size.
5563@end table
5564
5565So for example:
5566
5567@smallexample
9d5777a3 5568 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5569@end smallexample
5570
5571will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5572supported by the target.
5573
252b5132
RH
5574@node Symbols
5575@subsection Symbol Names
5576@cindex symbol names
5577@cindex names
5578@cindex quoted symbol names
5579@kindex "
5580Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5581and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5582Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5583specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5584keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5585@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5586"SECTION" = 9;
5587"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5588@end smallexample
5589
5590Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5591to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5592whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5593
ecca9871
L
5594@node Orphan Sections
5595@subsection Orphan Sections
5596@cindex orphan
5597Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5598are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5599script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5600output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5601placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5602attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5603same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5604If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5605at the end of the file.
5606
5607For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5608well as section flag.
5609
c005eb9e
AB
5610The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5611(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5612output sections an orphan is placed in.
5613
41911f68 5614If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5615the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5616__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5617section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5618orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5619representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5620character.
5621
252b5132
RH
5622@node Location Counter
5623@subsection The Location Counter
5624@kindex .
5625@cindex dot
5626@cindex location counter
5627@cindex current output location
5628The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5629current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5630location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5631within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5632anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5633
5634@cindex holes
5635Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5636moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5637location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5638and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5639doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5640
5641@smallexample
5642SECTIONS
5643@{
5644 output :
5645 @{
5646 file1(.text)
5647 . = . + 1000;
5648 file2(.text)
5649 . += 1000;
5650 file3(.text)
563e308f 5651 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5652@}
5653@end smallexample
5654@noindent
5655In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5656located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5657followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5658@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5659@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5660specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5661
5c6bbab8
NC
5662@cindex dot inside sections
5663Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5664current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5665statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5666absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5667however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5668not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5669
5670@smallexample
5671SECTIONS
5672@{
5673 . = 0x100
5674 .text: @{
5675 *(.text)
5676 . = 0x200
5677 @}
5678 . = 0x500
5679 .data: @{
5680 *(.data)
5681 . += 0x600
5682 @}
5683@}
5684@end smallexample
5685
5686The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5687and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5688the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5689much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5690move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5691and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5692the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5693the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5694
b5666f2f
AM
5695@cindex dot outside sections
5696Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5697output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5698needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5699
5700@smallexample
5701SECTIONS
5702@{
5703 start_of_text = . ;
5704 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5705 end_of_text = . ;
5706
5707 start_of_data = . ;
5708 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5709 end_of_data = . ;
5710@}
5711@end smallexample
5712
5713If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5714not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5715between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5716should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5717blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5718the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5719sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5720statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5721special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5722place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5723as follows:
5724
5725@smallexample
5726SECTIONS
5727@{
5728 start_of_text = . ;
5729 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5730 end_of_text = . ;
5731
5732 start_of_data = . ;
5733 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5734 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5735 end_of_data = . ;
5736@}
5737@end smallexample
5738
5739This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5740@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5741placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5742assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5743a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5744section. So you could write:
5745
5746@smallexample
5747SECTIONS
5748@{
5749 start_of_text = . ;
5750 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5751 end_of_text = . ;
5752
5753 . = . ;
5754 start_of_data = . ;
5755 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5756 end_of_data = . ;
5757@}
5758@end smallexample
5759
5760Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5761@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5762
252b5132
RH
5763@need 2000
5764@node Operators
5765@subsection Operators
5766@cindex operators for arithmetic
5767@cindex arithmetic operators
5768@cindex precedence in expressions
5769The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5770the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5771@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5772@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5773@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5774@smallexample
5775precedence associativity Operators Notes
5776(highest)
57771 left ! - ~ (1)
57782 left * / %
57793 left + -
57804 left >> <<
57815 left == != > < <= >=
57826 left &
57837 left |
57848 left &&
57859 left ||
578610 right ? :
578711 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5788(lowest)
5789@end smallexample
5790Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5791(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5792(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5793@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5794@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5795@tex
5796\vskip \baselineskip
5797%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5798\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5799\hrule
5800\halign
5801{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5802height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5803&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5804height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5805\noalign{\hrule}
5806height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5807&highest&&&&&\cr
5808% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5809&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5810&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5811&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5812&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5813&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5814&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5815&7&&left&&|&\cr
5816&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5817&9&&left&&||&\cr
5818&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5819&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5820&lowest&&&&&\cr
5821height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5822\hrule}
5823@end tex
5824@iftex
5825{
5826@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5827@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5828@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5829}
5830@end iftex
5831@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5832
5833@node Evaluation
5834@subsection Evaluation
5835@cindex lazy evaluation
5836@cindex expression evaluation order
5837The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5838an expression when absolutely necessary.
5839
5840The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5841address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5842regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5843as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5844
5845However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5846until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5847other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5848for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5849
5850The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5851assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5852allocation.
5853
5854Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5855@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5856
5857If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5858available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5859following
5860@smallexample
5861@group
5862SECTIONS
5863 @{
a1ab1d2a 5864 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5865 @{ *(.text) @}
5866 @}
5867@end group
5868@end smallexample
5869@noindent
5870will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5871address}.
5872
5873@node Expression Section
5874@subsection The Section of an Expression
5875@cindex expression sections
5876@cindex absolute expressions
5877@cindex relative expressions
5878@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5879@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5880@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5881Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5882relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5883using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5884value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5885symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5886operations.
5887
abf4be64
AM
5888Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5889section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5890address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5891@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5892functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5893One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5894(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5895differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5896versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5897section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5898Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5899absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5900given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5901everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5902
5903In the following simple example,
252b5132 5904
7542af2a
AM
5905@smallexample
5906@group
5907SECTIONS
5908 @{
5909 . = 0x100;
5910 __executable_start = 0x100;
5911 .data :
5912 @{
5913 . = 0x10;
5914 __data_start = 0x10;
5915 *(.data)
5916 @}
5917 @dots{}
5918 @}
5919@end group
5920@end smallexample
252b5132 5921
7542af2a
AM
5922both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5923address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5924@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5925section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5926
5c3049d2
AM
5927For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5928addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5929
5930@itemize @bullet
5931@item
c05f749e
AM
5932Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5933operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5934absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5935@item
7542af2a
AM
5936Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5937relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5938and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5939@item
c05f749e
AM
5940Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5941in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5942address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5943before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5944@end itemize
5945
5946The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5947
5948@itemize @bullet
5949@item
5950An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5951@item
5952The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5953@item
9bc8bb33 5954The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5955relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5956(after above conversions) is also a number.
5957@item
5958The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5959relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5960section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5961@item
5962The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5963conversions) is an absolute address.
5964@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5965
5966You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5967to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5968create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5969section @samp{.data}:
5970@smallexample
5971SECTIONS
5972 @{
5973 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5974 @}
5975@end smallexample
5976@noindent
5977If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5978@samp{.data} section.
5979
7542af2a
AM
5980Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5981particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5982
252b5132
RH
5983@node Builtin Functions
5984@subsection Builtin Functions
5985@cindex functions in expressions
5986The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5987use in linker script expressions.
5988
5989@table @code
5990@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5991@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5992@cindex expression, absolute
5993Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5994of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5995value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5996normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5997
5998@item ADDR(@var{section})
5999@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6000@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6001Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6002script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6003the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6004@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6005@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6006the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6007@smallexample
6008@group
6009SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6010 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6011 @{
252b5132
RH
6012 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6013 @dots{}
6014 @}
6015 .output :
6016 @{
6017 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6018 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6019 @}
6020@dots{} @}
6021@end group
6022@end smallexample
6023
876f4090
NS
6024@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6025@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6026@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6027@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6028@cindex round up location counter
6029@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6030@cindex round up expression
6031@cindex align expression
6032Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6033to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6034doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6035arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6036expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6037equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6038
6039Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6040next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6041variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6042input sections:
252b5132
RH
6043@smallexample
6044@group
6045SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6046 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6047 *(.data)
6048 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6049 @}
6050@dots{} @}
6051@end group
6052@end smallexample
6053@noindent
6054The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6055a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6056a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6057of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6058
6059The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6060
362c1d1a
NS
6061@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6062@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6063@cindex section alignment
6064Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6065been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6066evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6067the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6068value in that section.
6069@smallexample
6070@group
6071SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6072 .output @{
6073 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6074 @dots{}
6075 @}
6076@dots{} @}
6077@end group
6078@end smallexample
6079
252b5132
RH
6080@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6081@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6082This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6083scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6084section.
6085
2d20f7bf
JJ
6086@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6087@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6088This is equivalent to either
6089@smallexample
6090(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6091@end smallexample
6092or
6093@smallexample
6094(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6095@end smallexample
6096@noindent
6097depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6098for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6099@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6100If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6101memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6102bytes in the on-disk file.
6103
6104This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6105any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6106@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6107be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6108working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6109
6110@noindent
6111Example:
6112@smallexample
6113 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6114@end smallexample
6115
6116@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6117@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6118This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6119evaluation purposes.
6120
6121@smallexample
6122 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6123@end smallexample
6124
a4f5ad88
JJ
6125@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6126@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6127This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6128@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6129When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6130does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6131@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6132boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6133it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6134@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6135padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6136section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6137
6138@smallexample
6139 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6140@end smallexample
6141
252b5132
RH
6142@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6143@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6144@cindex symbol defaults
6145Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6146defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6147return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6148default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6149shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6150the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6151existed, its value is preserved:
6152
6153@smallexample
6154@group
6155SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6156 .text : @{
6157 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6158 @dots{}
6159 @}
6160 @dots{}
6161@}
6162@end group
6163@end smallexample
6164
3ec57632
NC
6165@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6166@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6167Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6168
252b5132
RH
6169@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6170@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6171@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6172Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6173Section LMA}).
6174
2e53f7d6
NC
6175@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6176@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6177Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6178@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6179
252b5132
RH
6180@kindex MAX
6181@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6182Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6183
6184@kindex MIN
6185@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6186Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6187
6188@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6189@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6190@cindex unallocated address, next
6191Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6192This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6193use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6194output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6195
3ec57632
NC
6196@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6197@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6198Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6199
ba916c8a
MM
6200@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6201@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6202Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6203value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6204@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6205will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6206can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6207``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6208name.
6209
252b5132
RH
6210@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6211@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6212@cindex section size
6213Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6214been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6215evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6216@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6217@smallexample
6218@group
6219SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6220 .output @{
6221 .start = . ;
6222 @dots{}
6223 .end = . ;
6224 @}
6225 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6226 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6227@dots{} @}
6228@end group
6229@end smallexample
6230
6231@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6232@itemx sizeof_headers
6233@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6234@cindex header size
6235Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6236information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6237this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6238choose, to facilitate paging.
6239
6240@cindex not enough room for program headers
6241@cindex program headers, not enough room
6242When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6243@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6244number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6245addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6246additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6247room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6248the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6249script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6250you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6251command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6252@end table
6253
6254@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6255@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6256@cindex implicit linker scripts
6257If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6258an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6259linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6260linker will report an error.
6261
6262An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6263
6264Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6265assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6266commands.
6267
6268Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6269at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6270read. This can affect archive searching.
6271
6272@ifset GENERIC
6273@node Machine Dependent
6274@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6275
6276@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6277@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6278sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6279functionality are not listed.
6280
6281@menu
36f63dca
NC
6282@ifset H8300
6283* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6284@end ifset
6285@ifset I960
6286* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6287@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6288@ifset M68HC11
6289* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6290@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6291@ifset ARM
6292* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6293@end ifset
6294@ifset HPPA
6295* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6296@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6297@ifset M68K
6298* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6299@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6300@ifset MIPS
6301* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6302@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6303@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6304* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6305@end ifset
2469cfa2 6306@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6307* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6308@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6309@ifset NDS32
6310* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6311@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6312@ifset NIOSII
6313* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6314@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6315@ifset POWERPC
6316* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6317@end ifset
6318@ifset POWERPC64
6319* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6320@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6321@ifset SPU
6322* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6323@end ifset
74459f0e 6324@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6325* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6326@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6327@ifset WIN32
6328* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6329@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6330@ifset XTENSA
6331* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6332@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6333@end menu
6334@end ifset
6335
252b5132
RH
6336@ifset H8300
6337@ifclear GENERIC
6338@raisesections
6339@end ifclear
6340
6341@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6342@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6343
6344@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6345For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6346you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6347
6348@table @emph
6349@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6350@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6351@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6352targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6353program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6354respectively.
6355
6356@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6357@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6358@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6359@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6360sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6361page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6362(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6363@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6364top page of memory).
1502569c 6365
81f5558e
NC
6366@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6367indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6368displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6369the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6370@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6371whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6372range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6373
1502569c 6374@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6375@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6376biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6377which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6378page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6379(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6380@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6381the top page of memory).
6382
6383@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6384@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
638532 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6386changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6387(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6388@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6389the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6390@end table
6391
6392@ifclear GENERIC
6393@lowersections
6394@end ifclear
6395@end ifset
6396
36f63dca 6397@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6398@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6399@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6400@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6401@node Renesas
6402@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6403
c2dcd04e
NC
6404@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6405H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6406options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6407@end ifset
6408@end ifclear
6409
6410@ifset I960
6411@ifclear GENERIC
6412@raisesections
6413@end ifclear
6414
6415@node i960
6416@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6417
6418@cindex i960 support
6419
6420You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6421specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6422family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6423incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6424linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6425libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6426search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6427
6428For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6429well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6430paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6431the names
6432
6433@smallexample
6434@group
6435try
6436libtry.a
6437tryca
6438libtryca.a
6439@end group
6440@end smallexample
6441
6442@noindent
6443The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6444two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6445
6446You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6447the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6448use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6449specifies a library.
6450
6451@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6452@cindex relaxing on i960
6453@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6454you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6455@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6456them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6457instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6458instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6459target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6460not itself call any subroutines).
6461
6462@ifclear GENERIC
6463@lowersections
6464@end ifclear
6465@end ifset
6466
6467@ifset ARM
6468@ifclear GENERIC
6469@raisesections
6470@end ifclear
6471
93fd0973
SC
6472@ifset M68HC11
6473@ifclear GENERIC
6474@raisesections
6475@end ifclear
6476
6477@node M68HC11/68HC12
6478@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6479
6480@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6481
6482@subsection Linker Relaxation
6483
6484For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6485optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6486
6487@table @emph
6488@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6489@item relaxing address modes
6490@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6491targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6492program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6493respectively.
6494
6495@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6496transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6497page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6498
6499@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6500When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6501of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6502addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6503@code{bset} instructions.
6504
6505@end table
6506
6507@subsection Trampoline Generation
6508
6509@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6510@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6511For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6512call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6513will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6514trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6515case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6516point to the function trampoline.
6517
6518@ifclear GENERIC
6519@lowersections
6520@end ifclear
6521@end ifset
6522
36f63dca 6523@node ARM
3674e28a 6524@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6525
6526@cindex ARM interworking support
6527@kindex --support-old-code
6528For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6529between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6530been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6531line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6532libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6533option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6534given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6535which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6536the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6537non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6538
6539@cindex thumb entry point
6540@cindex entry point, thumb
6541@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6542The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6543@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6544But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6545branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6546executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6547
ce11ba6c
KT
6548@cindex PE import table prefixing
6549@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6550The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6551the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6552element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6553import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6554
e489d0ae
PB
6555@cindex BE8
6556@kindex --be8
6557The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6558executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6559objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6560option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6561little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6562
3674e28a
PB
6563@cindex TARGET1
6564@kindex --target1-rel
6565@kindex --target1-abs
6566The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6567@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6568or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6569and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6570
6571@cindex TARGET2
6572@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6573The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6574@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6575meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6576@table @samp
6577@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6578@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6579@item abs
6580@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6581@item got-rel
6582@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6583@end table
6584
319850b4
JB
6585@cindex FIX_V4BX
6586@kindex --fix-v4bx
6587The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6588specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6589interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6590also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6591
6592In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6593linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6594@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6595
6596In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6597relocations are ignored.
6598
845b51d6
PB
6599@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6600@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6601Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6602relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6603
6604@smallexample
6605TST rM, #1
6606MOVEQ PC, rM
6607BX Rn
6608@end smallexample
6609
6610This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6611and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6612condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6613
33bfe774
JB
6614@cindex USE_BLX
6615@kindex --use-blx
6616The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6617BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6618situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6619code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6620each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6621
6622This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6623specify it if you are using that target.
6624
c6dd86c6
JB
6625@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6626@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6627The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6628bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6629instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6630to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6631the support code can read the intended values.
6632
6633The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6634intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6635and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6636intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6637full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6638you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6639
6640If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6641enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6642@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6643mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6644vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6645@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6646
6647If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6648potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6649such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6650first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6651instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6652the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6653are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6654
2de70689
MGD
6655@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6656@kindex --fix-arm1176
6657@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6658The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6659in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6660are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6661unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6662
9d5777a3 6663Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6664Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6665http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6666
bf21ed78
MS
6667@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6668@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6669The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6670warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6671enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6672linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6673using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6674not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6675
6676@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6677@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6678The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6679warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6680@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6681linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6682using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6683
726150b7
NC
6684@cindex PIC_VENEER
6685@kindex --pic-veneer
6686The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6687ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6688is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6689@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6690
6691@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6692@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6693The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6694code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6695perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6696placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6697controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6698The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6699duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6700group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6701code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6702where they should be placed.
6703
6704The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6705@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6706placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6707branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6708placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6709value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6710exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6711A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6712linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6713from the input sections.
6714
6715The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6716@samp{N = +1}.
6717
1a51c1a4
NC
6718Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6719only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6720otherwise.
6721
1db37fe6
YG
6722@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6723@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6724@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6725The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6726
6727The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6728
68fcca92
JW
6729@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6730@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6731@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6732The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6733
6734Please contact ARM for further details.
6735
1db37fe6
YG
6736@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6737@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6738@cindex Merging exidx entries
6739The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6740
6741@kindex --long-plt
6742@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6743The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6744which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6745entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6746
36f63dca
NC
6747@ifclear GENERIC
6748@lowersections
6749@end ifclear
6750@end ifset
6751
6752@ifset HPPA
6753@ifclear GENERIC
6754@raisesections
6755@end ifclear
6756
6757@node HPPA ELF32
6758@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6759@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6760@kindex --multi-subspace
6761When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6762import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6763The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6764stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6765multiple sub-spaces.
6766
6767@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6768@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6769Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6770stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6771@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6772sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6773a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6774the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6775conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6776prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6777A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6778branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6779@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6780@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6781detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6782positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6783
6784Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6785single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6786create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6787large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6788
6789@ifclear GENERIC
6790@lowersections
6791@end ifclear
6792@end ifset
6793
7fb9f789
NC
6794@ifset M68K
6795@ifclear GENERIC
6796@raisesections
6797@end ifclear
6798
6799@node M68K
6800@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6801
6802@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6803@kindex --got=@var{type}
6804The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6805The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6806@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6807the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6808@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6809entries only at non-negative offsets.
6810@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6811entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6812support such GOTs.
6813@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6814output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6815file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6816files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6817
6818@ifclear GENERIC
6819@lowersections
6820@end ifclear
6821@end ifset
6822
833794fc
MR
6823@ifset MIPS
6824@ifclear GENERIC
6825@raisesections
6826@end ifclear
6827
6828@node MIPS
6829@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6830
6831@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6832@kindex --insn32
6833@kindex --no-insn32
6834The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6835microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6836in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6837used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6838or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6839including 16-bit ones where possible.
6840
6841@ifclear GENERIC
6842@lowersections
6843@end ifclear
6844@end ifset
6845
36f63dca
NC
6846@ifset MMIX
6847@ifclear GENERIC
6848@raisesections
6849@end ifclear
6850
6851@node MMIX
6852@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6853For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6854@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6855understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6856can translate between the two formats.
6857
6858There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6859Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6860registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6861equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6862@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6863global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6864this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6865symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6866
7a2de473
HPN
6867Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6868@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6869The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6870of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6871
6872Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6873are left out from an mmo file.
6874
6875@ifclear GENERIC
6876@lowersections
6877@end ifclear
6878@end ifset
6879
6880@ifset MSP430
6881@ifclear GENERIC
6882@raisesections
6883@end ifclear
6884
6885@node MSP430
6886@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6887For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6888will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6889just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6890
6891@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6892The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6893
6894@table @code
6895@item @samp{.vectors}
6896Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6897
6898@item @samp{.bootloader}
6899Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6900in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6901
6902@item @samp{.infomem}
6903Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6904this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6905
c0065db7 6906@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6907This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6908in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6909
6910@item @samp{.noinit}
6911Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6912
c0065db7 6913The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6914@end table
6915
6916@ifclear GENERIC
6917@lowersections
6918@end ifclear
6919@end ifset
6920
35c08157
KLC
6921@ifset NDS32
6922@ifclear GENERIC
6923@raisesections
6924@end ifclear
6925
6926@node NDS32
6927@section @code{ld} and NDS32
6928@kindex relaxing on NDS32
6929For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6930relaxes objects according to these options.
6931
6932@table @code
6933@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6934Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6935
6936@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6937Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6938
6939@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6940Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6941
6942@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6943Export the EX9 table after linking.
6944
6945@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6946Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6947
6948@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6949Update the existing EX9 table.
6950
6951@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6952Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6953
6954@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6955Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6956
6957@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6958Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6959
6960@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6961Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6962@end table
6963
6964@ifclear GENERIC
6965@lowersections
6966@end ifclear
6967@end ifset
6968
78058a5e
SL
6969@ifset NIOSII
6970@ifclear GENERIC
6971@raisesections
6972@end ifclear
6973
6974@node Nios II
6975@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6976@cindex Nios II call relaxation
6977@kindex --relax on Nios II
6978
6979Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6980transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6981which may result in @command{ld} giving
6982@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6983The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6984trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6985outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6986trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6987be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6988larger than 256MB.
6989
6990The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6991is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6992@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6993locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6994source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6995register as a temporary.
6996
6997Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6998relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6999option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7000
7001@ifclear GENERIC
7002@lowersections
7003@end ifclear
7004@end ifset
7005
2a60a7a8
AM
7006@ifset POWERPC
7007@ifclear GENERIC
7008@raisesections
7009@end ifclear
7010
7011@node PowerPC ELF32
7012@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7013@cindex PowerPC long branches
7014@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7015Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7016displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7017@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7018@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7019the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7020section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7021section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7022@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7023both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7024considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7025
7026@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7027@table @option
7028@cindex PowerPC PLT
7029@kindex --bss-plt
7030@item --bss-plt
7031Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7032generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7033the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7034writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7035@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7036PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7037compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7038BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7039
016687f8
AM
7040@kindex --secure-plt
7041@item --secure-plt
7042@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7043@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7044when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7045layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7046style BSS PLT.
7047
2a60a7a8
AM
7048@cindex PowerPC GOT
7049@kindex --sdata-got
7050@item --sdata-got
7051The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7052sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7053@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7054section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7055@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7056@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7057@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7058@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7059PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7060pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7061GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7062really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7063
7064@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7065@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7066@item --emit-stub-syms
7067This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7068symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7069
7070@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7071@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7072@item --no-tls-optimize
7073PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7074sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7075disable the optimization.
7076@end table
7077
7078@ifclear GENERIC
7079@lowersections
7080@end ifclear
7081@end ifset
7082
7083@ifset POWERPC64
7084@ifclear GENERIC
7085@raisesections
7086@end ifclear
7087
7088@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7089@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7090
7091@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7092@table @option
7093@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7094@kindex --stub-group-size
7095@item --stub-group-size
7096Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7097by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7098@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7099sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7100a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7101the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7102conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7103prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7104A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7105branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7106@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7107@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7108detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7109positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7110
7111Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7112single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7113create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7114large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7115
7116@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7117@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7118@item --emit-stub-syms
7119This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7120symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7121
7122@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7123@kindex --dotsyms
7124@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7125@item --dotsyms
7126@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7127These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7128in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7129function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7130code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7131properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7132to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7133@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7134dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7135feature.
7136
7ae4ea7d
AM
7137@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7138@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7139@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7140@item --save-restore-funcs
7141@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7142These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7143provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7144@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7145function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7146link.
7147
2a60a7a8
AM
7148@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7149@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7150@item --no-tls-optimize
7151PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7152sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7153disable the optimization.
7154
7c9cf415
AM
7155@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7156@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7157@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7158@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7159@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7160These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7161stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7162an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7163@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7164stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7165option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7166Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7167slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7168application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7169normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7170
2a60a7a8
AM
7171@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7172@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7173@item --no-opd-optimize
7174PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7175corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7176the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7177Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7178
7179@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7180@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7181@item --non-overlapping-opd
7182Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7183@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7184the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7185entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7186
7187@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7188@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7189@item --no-toc-optimize
7190PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7191entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7192reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7193marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7194marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7195relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7196unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7197reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7198discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7199reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7200code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7201optimization.
7202
7203@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7204@kindex --no-multi-toc
7205@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7206If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7207@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7208where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7209entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7210total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7211grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7212TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7213calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7214help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
721564K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7216Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7217
7218@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7219@kindex --no-toc-sort
7220@item --no-toc-sort
7221By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7222happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7223placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7224with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7225referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7226@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7227results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7228off this feature.
7229
7230@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7231@kindex --plt-align
7232@kindex --no-plt-align
7233@item --plt-align
7234@itemx --no-plt-align
7235Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7236padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7237specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7238that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7239stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7240
7241@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7242@kindex --plt-static-chain
7243@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7244@item --plt-static-chain
7245@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7246Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7247chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7248chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7249
7250@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7251@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7252@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7253@item --plt-thread-safe
7254@itemx --no-thread-safe
7255With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7256lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7257another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7258order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7259memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7260barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7261looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7262seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7263default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7264@end table
7265
7266@ifclear GENERIC
7267@lowersections
7268@end ifclear
7269@end ifset
7270
49fa1e15
AM
7271@ifset SPU
7272@ifclear GENERIC
7273@raisesections
7274@end ifclear
7275
7276@node SPU ELF
7277@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7278
7279@cindex SPU ELF options
7280@table @option
7281
7282@cindex SPU plugins
7283@kindex --plugin
7284@item --plugin
7285This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7286
7287@cindex SPU overlays
7288@kindex --no-overlays
7289@item --no-overlays
7290Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7291regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7292@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7293turns off all this special overlay handling.
7294
7295@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7296@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7297@item --emit-stub-syms
7298This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7299symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7300
7301@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7302@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7303@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7304This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7305function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7306on calls to non-overlay regions.
7307
7308@cindex SPU local store size
7309@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7310@item --local-store=lo:hi
7311@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7312the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7313range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7314
c0065db7 7315@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7316@kindex --stack-analysis
7317@item --stack-analysis
7318SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7319unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7320under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7321@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7322@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7323determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7324for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7325for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7326for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7327find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7328and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7329under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7330dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7331is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7332and calls will be given.
7333
c0065db7 7334@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7335@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7336@item --emit-stack-syms
7337This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7338in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7339These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7340functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7341functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7342such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7343The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7344@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7345@end table
7346
7347@ifclear GENERIC
7348@lowersections
7349@end ifclear
7350@end ifset
7351
36f63dca
NC
7352@ifset TICOFF
7353@ifclear GENERIC
7354@raisesections
7355@end ifclear
7356
7357@node TI COFF
7358@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7359@cindex TI COFF versions
7360@kindex --format=@var{version}
7361The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7362TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7363also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7364format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7365header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7366
7367@ifclear GENERIC
7368@lowersections
7369@end ifclear
7370@end ifset
7371
2ca22b03
NC
7372@ifset WIN32
7373@ifclear GENERIC
7374@raisesections
7375@end ifclear
7376
7377@node WIN32
7378@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7379
c0065db7 7380This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7381See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7382command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7383
7384@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7385@cindex import libraries
7386@item import libraries
69da35b5 7387The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7388libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7389regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7390archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7391support for creating such libraries provided with the
7392@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7393
c0065db7
RM
7394@item exporting DLL symbols
7395@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7396The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7397
7398@table @emph
7399@item using auto-export functionality
7400@cindex using auto-export functionality
7401By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7402which is controlled by the following command line options:
7403
0a5d968e
NC
7404@itemize
7405@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7406@item --exclude-symbols
7407@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7408@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7409@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7410@end itemize
7411
09e2aba4
DK
7412When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7413(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7414symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7415often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7416private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7417options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7418exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7419final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7420
7421If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7422command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7423if either of the following are true:
7424
7425@itemize
7426@item A DEF file is used.
7427@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7428@end itemize
dc8465bf 7429
c0065db7
RM
7430@item using a DEF file
7431@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7432Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7433an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7434exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7435name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7436command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7437
7438@example
7439gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7440@end example
7441
0a5d968e
NC
7442Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7443@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7444
dc8465bf
NC
7445Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7446
7447@example
4b5bd4e7 7448LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7449
7450EXPORTS
7451foo
7452bar
7453_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7454another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7455var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7456doo = foo == foo2
7457eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7458@end example
dc8465bf 7459
7fcab871 7460This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7461symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7462alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7463by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7464@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7465@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7466export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7467in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7468symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7469
6b31ad16
DS
7470The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7471name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7472the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7473
b45619c0
NC
7474When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7475library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7476@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7477executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7478
7479With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7480specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7481non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7482
7483If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7484or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7485filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7486
4b5bd4e7
DS
7487The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7488
7489@example
7490EXPORTS
7491 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7492 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7493 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7494@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7495
7496Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7497@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7498@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7499@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7500Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7501@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7502string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7503
7504The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7505
7506@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7507will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7508by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7509linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7510library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7511
7512@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7513The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7514the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7515@code{*_imp__foo}).
7516
7517@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7518well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7519read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7520variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7521the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7522extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7523application will behave unexpectedly.
7524
7525@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7526it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7527symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7528API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7529the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7530
4b5bd4e7
DS
7531See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7532other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7533
7534@cindex creating a DEF file
7535While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7536with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7537
7538@item Using decorations
7539@cindex Using decorations
7540Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7541itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7542declared as:
7543
7544@example
7545__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7546__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7547@end example
7548
7549All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7550any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7551this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7552the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7553
7554Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7555decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7556instead:
7557
7558@example
7559__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7560__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7561@end example
7562
c0065db7
RM
7563This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7564when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7565variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7566code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7567of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7568omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7569@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7570information.
c0065db7 7571@end table
dc8465bf 7572
2ca22b03
NC
7573@cindex automatic data imports
7574@item automatic data imports
7575The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7576by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7577compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7578issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7579code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7580c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7581initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7582decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7583platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7584command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7585The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7586suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7587trigger the feature's use.
7588
c0065db7 7589auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7590additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7591
c0065db7 7592"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7593documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7594
c0065db7
RM
7595The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7596occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7597One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7598below.
7599
7600@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7601For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7602object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7603offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7604field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7605in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7606without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7607The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7608references.
7609
c0065db7
RM
7610The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7611be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7612themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7613runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7614compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7615support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7616run without error on an older system.
7617
c0065db7
RM
7618@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7619enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7620
7621@cindex direct linking to a dll
7622@item direct linking to a dll
7623The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7624including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7625libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7626traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7627libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7628function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7629though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7630storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7631tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7632large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7633
c0065db7 7634Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7635@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7636of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7637perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7638select the dll instead of an import library.
7639
2ca22b03 7640
69da35b5
NC
7641For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7642to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7643
7644@example
45e948fe
NC
7645libxxx.dll.a
7646xxx.dll.a
7647libxxx.a
7648xxx.lib
69da35b5 7649cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7650libxxx.dll
7651xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7652@end example
7653
69da35b5
NC
7654before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7655
c0065db7
RM
7656(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7657where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7658@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7659file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7660@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7661
c0065db7
RM
7662Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7663@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7664was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7665various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7666could coexist on the same machine.
7667
2ca22b03
NC
7668The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7669applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7670libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7671
7672@example
7673bin/
7674 cygxxx.dll
7675lib/
7676 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7677 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7678@end example
7679
c0065db7
RM
7680Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7681done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7682
76831. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7684@example
7685gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7686@end example
2ca22b03 7687
69da35b5
NC
7688However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7689(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7690@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7691not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7692
2ca22b03
NC
76932. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7694directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7695should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7696making the app/dll.
7697
7698@example
7699ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7700@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7701
7702Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7703
7704@example
7705gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7706@end example
69da35b5
NC
7707
7708This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7709perfectly legal
7710
7711@example
7712bin/
7713 cygxxx-5.dll
7714lib/
c0065db7 7715 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7716@end example
7717
dc8465bf 7718Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7719even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7720@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7721
7722Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7723wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7724
77251. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7726work with auto-imported data.
7727
dc8465bf
NC
77282. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7729import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7730symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7731for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7732possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7733
45e948fe
NC
77343. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7735critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7736in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7737stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7738
69da35b5 7739So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7740true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7741a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7742binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7743massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7744requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7745will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7746
c0065db7 7747@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7748@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7749@item adding additional names
7750Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7751A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7752exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7753when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7754import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7755
c0065db7 7756@example
dc8465bf
NC
7757LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7758
7759EXPORTS
c0065db7 7760foo
dc8465bf 7761_foo = foo
c0065db7 7762@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7763
7764The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7765
7766Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7767source code using the "weak" attribute:
7768
c0065db7
RM
7769@example
7770void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7771void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7772@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7773
7774See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7775symbols.
7776
7777@item renaming symbols
7778Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7779kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7780@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7781DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7782created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7783
c0065db7 7784@example
dc8465bf
NC
7785LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7786
7787EXPORTS
7788_foo = foo
c0065db7 7789@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7790
7791The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7792@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7793@end table
dc8465bf 7794
0a5d968e 7795Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7796unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7797If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7798@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7799that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7800@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7801renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7802to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7803the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7804In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7805which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7806
7807@cindex weak externals
7808@item weak externals
7809The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7810weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7811defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7812are three variants of weak externals:
7813@itemize
7814@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7815called lazy externals.
7816@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7817This form is not presently implemented.
7818@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7819implemented.
7820@end itemize
7821As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7822are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7823uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7824
7825@cindex aligned common symbols
7826@item aligned common symbols
7827As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7828desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7829the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7830carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7831by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7832tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7833but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7834warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 7835
2ca22b03
NC
7836@end table
7837
7838@ifclear GENERIC
7839@lowersections
7840@end ifclear
7841@end ifset
7842
e0001a05
NC
7843@ifset XTENSA
7844@ifclear GENERIC
7845@raisesections
7846@end ifclear
7847
7848@node Xtensa
7849@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7850
7851@cindex Xtensa processors
7852The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7853@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7854specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7855keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7856example, with the command:
7857
7858@smallexample
7859SECTIONS
7860@{
7861 .text : @{
7862 *(.literal .text)
7863 @}
7864@}
7865@end smallexample
7866
7867@noindent
7868@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7869and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7870literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7871interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7872group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7873files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7874and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7875
43cd72b9 7876@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7877@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7878Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7879provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7880is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7881literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7882will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7883location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7884the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7885unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7886@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7887range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7888
7889For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7890to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7891instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7892instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7893instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7894@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7895hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7896By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7897switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7898density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7899instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7900performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7901linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7902a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7903
7904The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7905control the linker:
7906
7907@cindex Xtensa options
7908@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7909@item --size-opt
7910When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7911more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7912no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7913alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7914preserve the correctness of the code.
7915@end table
e0001a05
NC
7916
7917@ifclear GENERIC
7918@lowersections
7919@end ifclear
7920@end ifset
7921
252b5132
RH
7922@ifclear SingleFormat
7923@node BFD
7924@chapter BFD
7925
7926@cindex back end
7927@cindex object file management
7928@cindex object formats available
7929@kindex objdump -i
7930The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7931These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7932object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7933format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7934it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7935associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7936object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7937(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7938list all the formats available for your configuration.
7939
7940@cindex BFD requirements
7941@cindex requirements for BFD
7942As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7943several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7944BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7945formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7946been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7947BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7948may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7949
7950One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7951mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7952useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7953conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7954
7955@menu
7956* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7957@end menu
7958
7959@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7960@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7961@cindex opening object files
7962@include bfdsumm.texi
7963@end ifclear
7964
7965@node Reporting Bugs
7966@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7967@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7968@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7969
ff5dcc92 7970Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7971
7972Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7973it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7974to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7975work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7976@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7977
7978In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7979information that enables us to fix the bug.
7980
7981@menu
7982* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7983* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7984@end menu
7985
7986@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7987@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7988@cindex bug criteria
7989
7990If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7991
7992@itemize @bullet
7993@cindex fatal signal
7994@cindex linker crash
7995@cindex crash of linker
7996@item
7997If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7998@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7999
8000@cindex error on valid input
8001@item
ff5dcc92 8002If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8003
8004@cindex invalid input
8005@item
ff5dcc92 8006If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8007may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8008object files are correct.
8009
8010@item
8011If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8012improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8013@end itemize
8014
8015@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8016@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8017@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8018@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8019
8020A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8021products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8022recommend you contact that organization first.
8023
8024You can find contact information for many support companies and
8025individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8026distribution.
8027
ad22bfe8 8028@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8029Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8030@value{BUGURL}.
8031@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8032
8033The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8034@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8035fact or leave it out, state it!
8036
8037Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8038problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8039assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8040matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8041the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8042location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8043were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8044into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8045specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8046and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8047
8048Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8049the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8050on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8051
8052Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8053bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8054respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8055You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8056
8057To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8058
8059@itemize @bullet
8060@item
ff5dcc92 8061The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8062the @samp{--version} argument.
8063
8064Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8065the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8066
8067@item
ff5dcc92 8068Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8069patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8070
8071@item
8072The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8073version number.
8074
8075@item
ff5dcc92 8076What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8077``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8078
8079@item
8080The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8081observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8082list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8083sufficient.
8084
8085If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8086and then we might not encounter the bug.
8087
8088@item
8089A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8090bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8091provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8092bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8093state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8094requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8095we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8096attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8097
8098If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8099@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8100object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8101@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8102how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8103
8104@item
8105A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8106incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8107
ff5dcc92 8108Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8109will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8110not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8111a chance to make a mistake.
8112
8113Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8114say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8115copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8116C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8117and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8118fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8119you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8120any conclusion from our observations.
8121
8122@item
ff5dcc92 8123If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8124diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8125@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8126If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8127context, not by line number.
8128
8129The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8130sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8131@end itemize
8132
8133Here are some things that are not necessary:
8134
8135@itemize @bullet
8136@item
8137A description of the envelope of the bug.
8138
8139Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8140which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8141changes will not affect it.
8142
8143This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8144will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8145with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8146We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8147
8148Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8149of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8150output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8151less time, and so on.
8152
8153However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8154report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8155
8156@item
8157A patch for the bug.
8158
8159A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8160the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8161a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8162to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8163
ff5dcc92 8164Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8165construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8166through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8167able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8168fixed.
8169
8170And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8171patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8172help us to understand.
8173
8174@item
8175A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8176
8177Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8178things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8179@end itemize
8180
8181@node MRI
8182@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8183@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8184To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8185linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8186alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8187described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8188simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8189@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8190linker commands; these commands are described here.
8191
8192In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8193file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8194features to make use of them.
8195
8196You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8197@samp{-c} command-line option.
8198
8199Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8200command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8201blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8202MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8203issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8204
8205Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8206
8207You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8208lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8209The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8210
8211@table @code
8212@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8213@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8214@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8215Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8216the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8217@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8218your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8219script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8220commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8221input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8222@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8223
8224@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8225@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8226Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8227in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8228
8229@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8230
8231@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8232@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8233Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8234@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8235
8236@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8237@item BASE @var{expression}
8238Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8239absolute addresses) in the output file.
8240
8241@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8242@item CHIP @var{expression}
8243@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8244This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8245
8246@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8247@item END
8248This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8249
8250@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8251@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8252Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8253language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8254
8255@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8256@item
252b5132
RH
8257S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8258
8259@item
8260IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8261
8262@item
8263COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8264@samp{COFF}
8265@end enumerate
8266
8267@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8268@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8269Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8270@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8271
8272The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8273same line, with no change in its effect.
8274
8275@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8276@item LOAD @var{filename}
8277@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8278Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8279same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8280command line.
8281
8282@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8283@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8284@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8285MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8286option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8287
8288@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8289@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8290@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8291Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8292order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8293script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8294sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8295file, in the order specified.
8296
8297@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8298@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8299@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8300@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8301Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8302@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8303
8304@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8305@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8306@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8307@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8308You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8309specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8310If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8311@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8312@end table
8313
793c5807
NC
8314@node GNU Free Documentation License
8315@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8316@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8317
370b66a1
CD
8318@node LD Index
8319@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8320
8321@printindex cp
8322
8323@tex
7ca01ed9 8324% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8325% meantime:
8326\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8327\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8328\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8329\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8330\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8331\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8332\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8333\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8334\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8335% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8336@end tex
8337
252b5132 8338@bye
This page took 1.245793 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.